Toshiba Fax Machine DP80F User Manual
PLAIN PAPER FACSIMILE  
/
OPERATOR’S MANUAL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTICE TO USERS  
Read through this manual before using the machine. Keep the manual in a convenient location so that you may refer to the manual whenever necessary.  
U. S. A.  
WARNING  
FCC Notice: Part 15  
If you experience trouble with this facsimile machine, please contact  
This terminal has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B  
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to  
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installa-  
tion. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and,  
if not installed and used in accordance with this guide, may cause harmful interfer-  
ence to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will  
not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interfer-  
ence to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the  
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by  
one or more of the following measures:  
TOSHIBA AMERICA BUSINESS SOLUTIONS, INC.  
Electronic Imaging Division  
2 Musick, Irvine, CA 92618-1631  
for repair/warranty information. If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone  
network, the telephone company may request you remove the equipment from the  
network, until the problem is resolved.  
The equipment may not used on coin service provided by the telephone network,  
connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs. (Contact the state public  
utility commission, or corporation commission for information.)  
-
-
-
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to  
which the receiver is connected.  
This device is equipped with a USOC RJ11C connector.  
-
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
THE TELEPHONE CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT: The Telephone Consumer  
Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other  
electronic device to send any message via a telephone fax machine unless such a  
message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page  
or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an  
identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the mes-  
sage and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other  
entity, or individual.  
WARNING  
FCC Notice: Part 68  
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules. On the rear of this  
equipment is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC Registration  
Number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for this equipment. If requested, this  
information must be provided to the telephone company.  
The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices that may be connected to the  
telephone line. Excessive REN’s on the telephone line may result in the devices not  
ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the  
REN’s should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that  
may be connected to the line, as determined by the total REN’s contact the  
telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area.  
In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the  
setup procedures listed for station ID number and name on pages 42 and 43 in this  
manual.  
This equipment is hearing aid compatible.  
If your facsimile machine causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone  
company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may  
be required. But if advance notice is not practical, you will be notified as soon as  
possible, also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if  
you believe it is necessary.  
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations,  
or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the  
telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the neces-  
sary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Canada  
NOTICE:  
The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certi-  
AVIS: L’étiquette d’lndustrie Canada identifie le marériel homologué. Cette  
étiquette certifie que le matériel est conforme aux normes de protection,  
d’exploitation et de sécurité des réseaux de télécommunications, comme le  
prescrivent les documents concernant les exigences techniques relatives au  
matériel terminal. Le Ministére n’assure toutefois pas que le matériel fonctionnera à  
la satisfaction de l’utilisateur.  
fication means that the equipment meets telecommunications network protective,  
operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal  
Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The Department does not guaran-  
tee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.  
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to  
connect a facsimile to the facilities of their local telecommunications company.  
The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection.  
The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not  
prevent degradation of service in some situations.  
Avant d’installer ce matériel, l’utilisateur doit s’assurer qu’il est permis de le  
raccorder aux installations de l’entreprise locale de télécommunication. Le matériel  
doit également être installé en suivant une méthode acceptée de raccordement.  
L’abonné ne doit pas oublier qu’il est possible que la conformité aux conditions  
énoncées ci-dessus n’empêche pas la dégradation du service dans certaines situa-  
tions.  
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated  
by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or  
equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to re-  
quest the user to disconnect the equipment.  
Les réparations de matériel homologué doivent être coordonnées par un  
représentant désigné par le fournisseur. L’entreprise de télécommunications peut  
demander à l’utilisateur de débrancher un appareil à la suite de réparations ou de  
modifications effectuées par l’utilisateur ou à cause de mauvais fonctionnement.  
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections  
of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if  
present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in  
rural areas.  
Pour sa propre protection, l’utilisateur doit s’assurer que tous les fils de mise à la  
terre de la source d’énergie électrique, des lignes téléphoniques et des  
canalisations d’eau métalliques, s’il y en a, sont raccordés ensemble. Cette  
précaution est particulièrement importante dans les régions rerales.  
CAUTION:  
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves,  
but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as  
appropriate.  
Avertissement:  
L’utilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements  
luimême; il doit avoir recours à un service d’inspection des installations électriques,  
ou à un électricien, selon le cas.  
The Ringer Equivalence Number of your facsimile is 0.3  
NOTICE:  
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal  
L’indice d’equivalence de la sonnerie de ce matériel 0.3  
device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be  
connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of  
any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the  
Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5.  
AVIS: L’indice d’équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) assigné à chaque dispositif  
terminal indique le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent être raccordés à une  
interface. La terminaison d’une interface téléphonique peut consister en une  
combinaison de quelques dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme d’indices  
d’équivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n’excède pas 5.  
TOSHIBA OF CANADA LIMITED  
Office Product Group  
191 McNABB STREET  
MARKHAM, ONTARIO L3R 8H2  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LASER SAFETY INFORMATION  
This facsimile is certified as a Class I laser product under the U.S. Department of  
Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to  
the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This means that this  
facsimile does not produce hazardous laser radiation.  
All laser light emitted inside the facsimile is completely confined within protective  
housings when any part of the facsimile is opened. This means that the facsimile is  
safe to use during normal operation and maintenance. Adjustment or performance  
of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous laser  
exposure.  
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug  
Administration implemented regulations for laser products. These regulations apply to  
laser products manufactured from August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for  
products marketed in the United States. The sample label shown below indicates  
compliance with these CDRH regulations and is attached to all laser facsimiles mar-  
keted in the United States.  
WARNING  
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other  
than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radia-  
tion exposure.  
Only trained and qualified personnel may open covers or remove  
parts that are not explicitly shown and described in the Operator’s  
Manual as being accessible to the Operator.  
01  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTENTS  
USER INTERFACE OPERATION ...........................................35  
Menu Operation .....................................................................................35  
Character Entry .....................................................................................36  
NOTICETO USERS ................................................................1  
LASER SAFETY INFORMATION ........................................... 3  
FEATURES .............................................................................8  
CARE AND MAINTENANCE..................................................9  
INITIAL SETUP ......................................................................38  
Initial Setting Summary..........................................................................38  
Language Selection ...............................................................................39  
Date and Time Setting ...........................................................................40  
Terminal ID Setting ................................................................................42  
Dial Type Setting ....................................................................................44  
INTRODUCTION.......................................................... 10  
FACSIMILE UNIT DESCRIPTIONS ........................................10  
Front View..............................................................................................10  
Rear View ..............................................................................................11  
DEVICE CONFIGURATION....................................................45  
Configuration Summary.........................................................................45  
Ringer Volume Adjustment ....................................................................46  
Alarm Tone Volume Adjustment .............................................................47  
Key TouchTone Volume Adjustment.......................................................48  
MonitorVolume Adjustment ...................................................................49  
Power Saver Operation..........................................................................50  
Department Code Setting ......................................................................52  
Department Code Maintenance.............................................................54  
Account Codes Setting ..........................................................................56  
Line Monitor Default Setting...................................................................57  
Receive Interval Setting Operation ........................................................58  
ECM Default Setting ..............................................................................59  
Sort Copy Setting ..................................................................................60  
Setting Redial (Interval and Counter).....................................................61  
Reception Mode Default Setting ............................................................62  
Copy Reduction Setting .........................................................................64  
OPERATION PANEL ..............................................................13  
SETUP ......................................................................... 16  
UNPACKING ...........................................................................16  
Unpack the Carton ................................................................................16  
Make Sure All Items are Enclosed.........................................................16  
Select a Desirable Location ...................................................................17  
FACSIMILE MACHINE INSTALLATION ................................. 18  
ConnectingYour TOSHIBA Facsimile.....................................................18  
Recording Paper Exit Tray .....................................................................19  
Document Support ................................................................................19  
Document Exit Tray................................................................................19  
Recording Paper Tray ............................................................................19  
Bypass Tray ...........................................................................................19  
INITIAL PRINTING SUPPLIES INSTALLATION .................... 20  
Recording Paper Installation (Recording Paper Tray).............................20  
Recording Paper Installation (Bypass Tray) ...........................................23  
Recording Paper Installation (Optional Recording Paper Tray)...............24  
Drum Unit and Toner Cartridge Installation ............................................27  
BASIC FUNCTIONS .................................................... 65  
AUTOMATICTELEPHONE DIALING .....................................65  
Abbreviated Dialer Registration .............................................................65  
One Touch Dialer Registration ...............................................................71  
Group Number Registration ...................................................................77  
PRINTING SUPPLIES REPLACEMENT ................................ 29  
Toner Cartridge Replacement................................................................29  
Drum Unit Replacement ........................................................................31  
TRANSMIT CONFIGURATION...............................................81  
Document Specifications .......................................................................81  
Document Loading ................................................................................82  
Scan Resolution Setting ........................................................................83  
Contrast Setting.....................................................................................84  
QUICK START ........................................................................34  
Terminal ID ............................................................................................34  
Transmitting ...........................................................................................34  
Receiving ..............................................................................................34  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting for Document Mode (Resolution and Contrast)..............85  
CANCELLING A COMMUNICATION JOB.............................110  
Cancelling a Direct Transmission ...........................................................110  
Cancelling a Job Reservation ................................................................110  
COPYING ............................................................................... 86  
Paper Size for Copying ..........................................................................86  
Copying Procedure ................................................................................87  
ADVANCED FUNCTIONS ........................................... 112  
DIALING METHODS ..............................................................89  
One Touch Key Dialing...........................................................................89  
Abbreviated Dialing................................................................................90  
Alphabet Dialing ....................................................................................91  
Keypad Dialing ......................................................................................92  
MULTI-ADDRESSTRANSMISSION (BROADCASTING) ...... 112  
Group Broadcast Transmission ..............................................................112  
Multi-Key Quick Broadcast Transmission ...............................................113  
RELAYTRANSMISSION ........................................................115  
Relay Transmission, Relay-Relay Transmission Overview .....................115  
Relay Transmission Originating Procedure ............................................116  
TRANSMITTING .....................................................................93  
MemoryTransmission............................................................................93  
Memory Transmission Procedure .....................................................94  
DirectTransmission ...............................................................................95  
Direct Transmission as Default Setting..............................................95  
Temporary Direct Transmission.........................................................97  
On-hook Transmission (Monitor Speaker Dialing) .............................98  
Off-hook Transmission (Optional Handset Dialing) ...........................99  
External Off-hook Transmission  
POLLING & MAILBOX COMMUNICATIONS .........................118  
Polling & Mailbox Overview....................................................................118  
Polling Reservation...........................................................................118  
Polling Reception..............................................................................118  
Open Mailbox (ITU-T Compatible) ....................................................119  
Simple & Security Polling Reservation ...................................................120  
Multi Mailbox Polling Reservation ..........................................................122  
Simple & Secure Polling ........................................................................124  
Multi-Address Polling .............................................................................126  
Turnaround Polling .................................................................................128  
Continuous Polling .................................................................................130  
(Transmission Using an External Telephone) ....................................101  
Redialing ...............................................................................................102  
Automatic Redialing..........................................................................102  
Manual Redialing Direct Transmission ..............................................102  
Manual Redialing Jobs in Memory....................................................103  
MAILBOX (ITU-T Compatible)...............................................132  
Setting Up a Mailbox..............................................................................132  
Deleting a Mailbox .................................................................................134  
Sending a Document to a Mailbox (Remote Hub) ..................................136  
Reserving a Document to a Mailbox (Local Hub)...................................138  
Retrieving (Polling) a Document from a Mailbox (Remote Hub) .............140  
Printing a Document from a Mailbox (Local Hub) ..................................142  
Cancelling Documents in a Mailbox (Local Hub)....................................144  
RECEIVING ............................................................................104  
Automatic Reception Mode....................................................................104  
FAX/TAD Switching Mode ......................................................................104  
TEL/FAX Auto Switching Mode ..............................................................105  
Manual Receiving Mode ........................................................................105  
Selecting the Reception Mode ...............................................................106  
Recording Paper Size ............................................................................106  
TELEPHONE HANDSET OPERATION (Optional) ................107  
On-hook Dialing.....................................................................................107  
Tone Output ...........................................................................................108  
Redialing ...............................................................................................108  
ADVANCEDTRANSMISSION FUNCTIONS ..........................146  
Department Code Access .....................................................................146  
Account Code Entry ..............................................................................147  
Chain Dialing .........................................................................................148  
Default Setting for Memory Transmission...............................................149  
Default Setting for Security Transmission ...............................................150  
Cover Sheet Registration.......................................................................151  
COMMUNICATION STATUS...................................................109  
Current Job Status ................................................................................109  
Communication Journal.........................................................................109  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Recovery Transmission..............................................................152  
TTI (Transmit Terminal ID) Print .............................................................153  
Send after Scan Default Setting.............................................................155  
Document Length Setting ......................................................................156  
PIN Mask...............................................................................................157  
Multi-Polling Report Setting ...................................................................192  
Relay Originator Report Setting .............................................................193  
Reception List Settings ..........................................................................194  
LIST AND REPORT PRINT FORMAT AND  
PRINTING PROCEDURE .......................................................195  
Transmission/Reception Journal (Communication Journal) ...................195  
Transmission Report..............................................................................196  
Memory Transmission Report ................................................................197  
Reservation List.....................................................................................198  
Multi-Address Transmission Report .......................................................199  
Multi-Polling Report ...............................................................................200  
Relay Send Originator Report ...............................................................201  
Mailbox (ITU-T Compatible F-code Communication) List.......................202  
Department Control List ........................................................................203  
Preset Dialing Number Lists ..................................................................204  
All of Lists .........................................................................................204  
Abbreviated Dial Number List ...........................................................205  
One Touch Number List ....................................................................206  
Group Number List ...........................................................................207  
Address Book List ............................................................................208  
Function List .....................................................................................209  
Menu List..........................................................................................210  
Power Failure List ..................................................................................211  
ADVANCED RECEPTION FUNCTIONS ................................158  
Secure Reception Access Code Setting ................................................158  
Secure RX Activation Period Setting......................................................160  
Memory Reception Setting ....................................................................162  
Reception-Reduction Setting .................................................................163  
Reception-Discard Setting .....................................................................164  
Reverse Order Printing Setting ..............................................................165  
Privileged Reception..............................................................................166  
RTI (Remote Terminal ID) Print..............................................................167  
Setting Separator Page .........................................................................168  
Secure RX Temporary Stop ...................................................................169  
ADVANCED PC FUNCTION...................................................170  
Letter Head Paper Setting .....................................................................170  
TRANSMISSION OPTIONS ...................................................171  
SecurityTransmission ............................................................................171  
Disabling ECM Temporarily....................................................................172  
Dialing with Sub-Address ......................................................................173  
Enabling or Disabling Send after Scan Temporarily ...............................175  
Attaching or Printing a Cover Sheet.......................................................177  
Delayed Communication (Time Designation) .........................................179  
PriorityTransmission .............................................................................180  
Sending Recovery Transmission............................................................181  
Low Speed Transmission .......................................................................183  
Line Monitor...........................................................................................184  
Setting the Page Count..........................................................................185  
Communication Report Print .................................................................186  
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................. 212  
Error Messages .....................................................................................212  
Paper Jam Error Codes .........................................................................214  
Error Codes Printed on Reports ............................................................215  
Transmission Problems..........................................................................216  
Reception Problems ..............................................................................217  
Clearing a Document Jam .....................................................................218  
Clearing a Recording Paper Jam ...........................................................219  
When the Recorded Image is not Clear... ..............................................224  
Document Scanner Cleaning Procedure ..........................................224  
Recording Unit Cleaning Procedure .................................................226  
LISTS AND REPORTS ................................................ 187  
LIST AND REPORT OPTIONS SETTING ..............................187  
Reception Journal Settings....................................................................187  
Direct Transmission Report Setting........................................................189  
Memory Transmission Report Setting ....................................................190  
Multi-Address Report Setting.................................................................191  
USER TEST MODE...................................................... 228  
AUTOMATICTEST MODE ......................................................228  
AUTO TEST...........................................................................................228  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDIVIDUALTEST MODE ...................................................... 229  
INDIVIDUAL TEST Summary ................................................................229  
ADF TEST .............................................................................................230  
KEY TEST .............................................................................................232  
LED TEST .............................................................................................233  
LCD TEST .............................................................................................234  
SPEAKER TEST ...................................................................................235  
SENSOR TEST .....................................................................................236  
PRINT TEST..........................................................................................238  
TEST RESULT ........................................................................239  
PRINTING a TEST RESULT..................................................................239  
REMOTE SERVICE ..................................................... 240  
RDC (Remote Diagnosis Configuration) Service ...............240  
AUTOMATIC SUPPLIES ORDER........................................... 241  
Automatic Supplies Order Setting ..........................................................241  
SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................... 242  
SUPPLIES ................................................................... 243  
HARDWARE OPTIONS ............................................... 243  
TOSHIBA VIEWER....................................................... 245  
INDEX .......................................................................... 275  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FEATURES  
Super G3 High-speed Communications (DP85F only)  
Provides state-of-the-art V.34 modem technology for worldwide compatibility at  
speeds up to 33,600 bits per second.  
Substitute Memory Reception  
When the recording paper or supplies have been depleted or in the event of a  
recording paper jam, your receptions will be safely stored in memory until the  
problem is corrected.  
High Resolution, 128 Level Halftone  
With a maximum resolution of 16 dots/mm x 15.4 lines/mm (406 DPI x 391 LPI)  
and 128 level halftone, precision drawings, small-size characters, photographs,  
etc. are copied, sent, and received with exceptional clarity.  
Memory Release  
Minimizes the potential for memory overflows when connected with a remote loca-  
tion. After each page has been successfully transmitted it is released from memory  
to make room for subsequent pages.  
Open Network Mailbox Systems  
TOSHIBA Viewer  
Your new Toshiba provides ITU-T F-code communication for Open Mailbox opera-  
tion.  
Installing the TOSHIBA Viewer software that comes with the machine enables  
following functions (see page 244).  
Rapid Scan Document Scanning  
• 600 dpi plain paper laser printer  
PC print jobs are printed on plain paper at a crisp 600 dpi print resolution.  
Allows letter sized originals to be scanned into memory in as little as 3 seconds  
per page.  
• Setting and programming the machine from a PC  
You can set up and program the machine from a PC.  
38 Programmable One Touch Autodialer Keys  
Allows remote locations to be quickly dialed at the touch of a key saving time and  
eliminating mis-dialed phone numbers.  
• PC Scanner function  
The machine can be used as a Twain compatible B/W image scanner (16 dots/  
mm x 15.4 dots/mm max.).  
100/150 Abbreviated Autodial Locations  
In addition to the 38 One Touch Autodialer Keys, 100 (DP80F)/150 (DP85F) ab-  
breviated locations can also be programmed with other frequently called locations.  
These locations can then be easily accessed using abbreviated codes ranging  
from 001 to 999.  
User Test Mode  
The user test mode can help you to find the cause of a machine problem should a  
failure occur.  
5 Function Keys  
Auto Supply Order Function  
Five frequently used functions are assigned to the keys located on the right side of  
One Touch Index Panel. These keys allow direct access to frequently used func-  
tion settings and operations.  
This function allows the machine to order supplies (Drum Kit and Toner Kit) auto-  
matically.  
Multi-address (Broadcast Transmission)  
This feature allows the transmission of a document to multiple remote units with  
one operation sequence. Locations may be selected using the autodialer or infre-  
quently dialed locations that have not been preregistered.  
Multi-Memory Access Operation  
Allows up to 4 operations such as transmission or reception, printing, scanning,  
and programming to be performed at the same time.  
Super Power Saver Mode  
Reduces power consumption to approx. 2W by turning all unnecessary functions  
off in the standby mode.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CARE AND MAINTENANCE  
Do not Place the Unit in the Following Environments  
About Power for the Unit  
•
•
This unit requires 120 V AC, 60Hz electric power. This unit should not be used in  
countries that do not conform to these domestic power provisions.  
Do not place this facsimile unit in the environments described below.  
•
Where temperature is excessively high, such as places close to heaters, radiators,  
direct sunlight, etc.  
Insert the power cord plug firmly to the wall outlet, then insert the other end of the  
cord into the receptacle on the machine. If it is not firmly connected, the unit will  
not operate normally. When unplugging the unit, grasp by the plug and not the  
cord.  
•
•
•
•
•
Where the temperature can become excessively low.  
Where water or any chemicals may come in contact with the unit.  
Where the humidity is too high.  
•
•
Do not share one outlet with too many electric appliances. This may create a fire  
hazard.  
Where dust, dirt, metal filings, or hazardous gases may exist.  
When the possibility of lightning arises, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
Also, unplug the phone cord from the facsimile unit. This prevents possible dam-  
age from lightning striking power or phone lines.  
Near equipment with strong magnetic fields, such as a radio’s, TV’s, audio  
amplifier’s, speaker’s, or other electric appliances.  
•
•
Where condensation may easily result, i.e., an environment subject to sudden  
temperature changes, such as places close to an air-conditioner or heater.  
•
•
Avoid sharing the electrical wall outlet with other equipment that may cause power  
surges (air-conditioners, large copiers, etc.). Power surges may cause the unit to  
malfunction.  
Where vibrations frequently occur. (Provide a space of 4 inches or more between  
the rear side of the unit and the wall.)  
Do not step on the power cord, and do not place anything on it.  
Other Remarks  
When a Power Failure Occurs  
•
•
In the event of a power failure, neither facsimile nor telephone functions of the unit  
are available.  
•
Do not disassemble or modify the facsimile unit. This may result in electric shock,  
hazard or machine malfunction.  
In the event a power failure occurs (or the power to the unit has been discon-  
nected), functions and unit operation will not be possible. The following items in  
memory will be erased:  
•
•
Keep fire sources away from the facsimile unit. This may create a fire hazard.  
Keep paper clips and staples away from the unit. If metal objects fall in the unit,  
they may damage the machine.  
•
Document data stored in memory for Transmission, Substitute Memory Recep-  
tions, etc.  
•
•
•
•
•
Avoid opening the unit while it is scanning or printing. The operation will stop and it  
may cause a malfunction and/or damage.  
•
The address and designated time of each Timer Transmission, Timer Polling  
Reception, etc.  
Do not drop, hit, or apply excessive shocks to the unit, as this may result in  
damage to the unit.  
•
•
Programmed data such as the clock, Auto Dial Numbers and user configurations  
will not be erased.  
When using international or discount communications services, communication  
reliability may be impaired.  
In the event that document data has been erased  
due to a power failure, the message “POWER FAIL-  
Use of non authorized parts or supplies may result in damage to the unit and could  
result in termination of the service or warranty agreement.  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 99%  
URE” is displayed on the LCD as shown to the right  
POWER FAILURE  
and a Power Failure Report is issued once the  
If any abnormal conditions occur, such as emitting of smoke or burning odor,  
immediately disconnect power to the unit and contact your authorized Toshiba  
dealer for service.  
power is restored (see page 211).  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INTRODUCTION - FACSIMILE UNIT DESCRIPTIONS  
Front View  
Recording Paper  
Exit Tray Extension  
Document Guides  
Supports long recording  
Adjust the guides to the edges of  
paper after printing.  
the document to help ensure proper  
Recording Paper Exit Tray  
document alignment and smooth  
feeding. (See page 82.)  
Stacks recording paper after  
printing. (See page 19.)  
Document Support Extension  
Operation Panel  
Supports long original documents  
to transmit or copy.  
Used to perform programming  
and operation of the facsimile  
machine. (See page 13.)  
Document Support  
Place documents face down on  
this tray to transmit or copy.  
Document Exit Tray  
Stacks the original  
documents after scanning.  
Operation Panel Release Position  
Provides access to the document  
scanner area for periodical cleaning or  
clearing jammed originals. Grasp the  
center of the Control Panel and pull  
forward to open. (See page 218.)  
Document Exit Tray Extension  
Supports long original documents  
after scanning. (See page 19.)  
Paper Tray  
Bypass Tray  
Holds up to 250 sheets of  
recording paper.  
(See page 20.)  
Load a sheet of recording  
paper. (See page 23.)  
02  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rear View  
External Telephone  
Connector  
Connection for an External  
Telephone set.  
(See page 18.)  
Handset Connector  
Connection for the optional  
Handset unit. (See page 18.)  
Top Cover Open Button  
Provides access to printer section to  
replace supplies or to clear paper  
jams. (See pages 27, 29 and 220.)  
Line Connector  
Connection for the telephone  
line cord from wall or PSTN  
system. (See page 18.)  
AC Inlet  
Centronics PC Interface  
This interface is used for connection to  
personal computers for Scanning,  
Printing and programming various  
settings from PC.  
03  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When Optional Recording Paper Tray is Installed  
With Optional Recording Paper Tray Installed  
04  
Lower Recording  
Paper Tray (Optional)  
Upper Recording  
Paper Tray  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
- OPERATION PANEL  
1. LCD Display  
Press this key prior to selecting the One Touch keys (No.20 to No.38).  
Display machine status and configuration information for operator viewing and  
interaction.  
7. DELETE Key  
This key is used to delete characters in CHARACTER ENTRY mode (see page  
36).  
2. ONLINE Lamp  
Blinks when communicating between the facsimile unit and a personal computer.  
8. INSERT Key  
3. ALARM Lamp  
This key is used to insert characters in CHARACTER ENTRY mode (see page 36).  
Is illuminated when any error occurs (see page 212).  
9. POWER SAVER key and POWER SAVER Lamp  
Press this key to select the Super Power Saver Mode.  
Illuminated when the facsimile is in the Super Power Save Mode.  
4. BUSY Lamp  
Illuminated when communicating using the phone line.  
5. One Touch Keys  
10.JOB CANCEL Key  
Allows remote locations to be dialed at the touch of a button (see page 89).  
Used to cancel a job reserved or being performed (see page 110).  
6. SHIFT Key  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Used for accessing Abbreviated, Alphabet, or Group dialing telephone directories  
(see pages 90 and 91).  
11.Menu Keys (  
,
,
,
Keys)  
22.MULTI/CHARGE CODE Key  
These keys are used to scroll LCD menu prompts (see page 35).  
Performs Multi-address Transmissions (Broadcast) or a Multi-polling receptions  
(see page 113). This key also used to input the charge code (see page 157).  
12.ENTER Key  
Press this key to enter a selected menu item or select a menu entry.  
23.Dial Keypad  
Use these 12 keys just like a telephone keypad to dial telephone/facsimile num-  
bers (see page 35).  
13.JOB STATUS Key  
Displays the communication status of reserved transmissions (see page 109).  
The dial keys are also used to enter alphanumeric characters for remote parties  
names, etc. (see page 36).  
14.MODE Key and FINE, U-FINE, HALFTONE Lamps  
Select the desired resolution for transmission or copying. When Standard mode is  
selected, none of the MODE lamps will be illuminated (see page 83).  
The  
is also used as the [TONE] Key. The  
key is helpful to access  
15.CONTRAST Key and DARKER, LIGHTER Lamps  
Select the desired contrast level of transmit document or copying. When normal  
mode is selected, none of the CONTRAST lamps will be illuminate (see page 84).  
various services requiring touch-tone dialing when you are connected to a Rotary  
line (see page 108).  
16.COPY Key  
Press this key, with a document in the Document Support, to copy a document  
(see page 87).  
17.STOP Key  
Used to stop operation or cancel system programming. This key is also used to  
clear an error condition.  
18.START Key  
Press this key to start facsimile communication. This key is also used to complete  
programming.  
19.MONITOR Key  
Used to enable the speaker monitor, for monitoring call progress during non  
memory document feeder transmissions (see page 98).  
20.REDIAL/PAUSE Key  
Press this key to redial a facsimile/telephone number if the number was busy on  
your first try (see page 108). Or, use this key to enter a pause between telephone  
digits when entering a remote facsimile number.  
21.SPEED DIAL/ALPHA Key  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Keys  
Frequently used functions are pre-assigned to five keys  
on the right side of One Touch key panel.  
01  
20  
02  
21  
03  
22  
04  
23  
DIRECT  
SEND  
05  
24  
06  
25  
07  
26  
08  
27  
TX  
REPORT  
09  
28  
10  
29  
11  
30  
12  
31  
CHAIN  
DIAL  
13  
32  
14  
33  
15  
34  
16  
35  
JO  
U
R
NAL  
17  
36  
18  
37  
19  
38  
SHIFT  
AUTO  
DIRECT SEND  
Allows transmission direct from the document feeder without scanning the docu-  
ment to memory first (see page 95).  
TX REPORT  
Press this key to request or disable a Transmission Report for your current trans-  
mission job.  
CHAIN DIAL  
Used to dial a remote party using Chain Dialing (see page 148).  
JOURNAL  
Used to print communication journals (see page 187).  
AUTO  
Used to select the reception mode, auto receive, Fax/Tad, Tel/Fax or manual.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP - UNPACKING  
1
2
Unpack the Carton  
Make Sure All Items are Enclosed  
9
5
2
1
7
10  
3
11  
6
8
4
12  
Packing List  
Check the carton and report any damage to the delivery  
service. Save the carton and packing materials for future  
use.  
1. Facsimile .................................................. 1  
2. Phone Line Cord (Modular Cord).............. 1  
3. Document Exit Tray .................................. 1  
4. Recording Paper Exit Tray ....................... 1  
5. Document Support ................................... 1  
7. Drum Unit ................................................. 1  
8. Toner Cartridge ........................................ 1  
9. Operator’s Manual .................................... 1  
10. Warranty Card .......................................... 1  
11. AC Power Cord ........................................ 1  
12. Toshiba Viewer CD-ROM ......................... 1  
Check the items in the carton with the following packing  
list. If anything is missing, contact your dealer immedi-  
ately.  
6. Paper Tray Assembly  
(with Bypass Tray) ................................... 1  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Select a Desirable Location  
The unit should be installed:  
120 mm  
(4.72 inches)  
400 mm  
(15.74 inches)  
•
•
•
On a horizontal surface.  
Away from direct sunlight, dust, extreme heat and humidity, and vibration.  
Away from sources of strong electrical or magnetic fields, such as televisions or  
radios.  
•
Within reach of an electrical outlet. Use an outlet not shared with equipment that  
generates electrical noise or consumes large amounts of electricity, such as an air  
conditioner, or a copier.  
•
•
Within reach of a telephone connection. Use a dedicated, single-line telephone  
connection.  
Allow for adequate ventilation. The rear and sides of the unit need to be clear to  
allow proper air flow to the unit’s power supply.  
Height: 650 mm (25.6 inches)  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
- FACSIMILE MACHINE INSTALLATION  
Connecting Your TOSHIBA Facsimile  
Make sure that the Power Switch is turned OFF.  
Plug in the power cord as in the figure below.  
Connect the telephone line cord (modular cord) to the “LINE” connector.  
Connect the external telephone set (if desired) to the “TEL” connector.  
Connect the optional Handset (if equipped) to the “HANDSET” connector.  
Power Switch  
OFF  
18  
19  
Power Cord  
WARNING  
•
•
•
•
•
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.  
Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.  
Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.  
Use caution when installing or modifying the telephone lines.  
Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electric storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from  
lightning.  
•
Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Document Exit Tray  
Bypass Tray  
Recording Paper Exit Tray  
Document Support  
Recording Paper Tray  
Recording Paper Exit  
Tray Installation  
Document Support  
Installation  
Document Exit Tray  
Installation  
Recording Paper Tray  
Installation  
Bypass Tray Installation  
20  
22  
21  
24  
23  
Fit the tabs of the Recording Fit the tabs of the Document  
Paper Exit Tray into the slots on Support into the slots on the top  
Fit the tabs of the Document  
Exit Tray into the slots on the  
front side of the unit.  
Lift the Document Exit Tray so Place the Bypass Tray on the  
that it catches on the under side Recording Paper Tray.  
of the Operation Panel.  
the back side of the unit.  
side of the unit.  
•
Do not place heavy objects  
on the Bypass Tray or apply  
strong force.  
•
•
Do not place heavy objects  
on the Recording Paper Exit  
Tray or apply strong force.  
•
•
Do not place heavy objects  
on the Document Support or  
apply strong force.  
Place the hooks of the Record-  
ing Paper Tray to the guides on  
the front side of the unit.  
•
Do not place heavy objects  
on the Document Exit Tray  
or apply strong force.  
Extend the Recording Paper  
Exit Tray Extension for long  
recording paper.  
Extend the Document Sup-  
port Extension for long docu-  
ments.  
•
Extend the Document Exit  
Tray Extension for long  
documents.  
•
Do not place heavy objects  
on the Recording Paper Tray  
or apply strong force.  
NOTE:  
It may be necessary to gen-  
tly bow the base of the sup-  
port toward you as you place  
the support into position.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
- INITIAL PRINTING SUPPLIES INSTALLATION  
Recording Paper Installation (Recording Paper Tray)  
About Recording Paper:  
About Paper Sizes:  
Pull Up the  
Document Exit Tray  
Remove the Bypass  
Tray  
Open the Paper  
Guides  
1
2
3
•
Use only recommended pa-  
per brands to optimize your  
facsimile performance. Con-  
tact your authorized TOSHI-  
BA dealer for more informa-  
tion.  
•
Your TOSHIBA facsimile has  
been preset to accept letter  
size recording paper.  
In the event that you receive  
a legal-size (8.5”x14”) recep-  
tion, it will automatically be  
reduced to fit onto letter-size  
(8.5”x11”) paper.  
•
•
Remove the recording paper  
when storing or relocating  
your facsimile.  
•
•
If you receive only legal-  
size receptions and do not  
wish them to be automati-  
cally reduced: Load the le-  
gal-size paper in the tray.  
Avoid using damaged, folded  
or misaligned recording pa-  
per. Use of damaged paper  
could cause double feeding  
or paper jamming.  
31  
25  
30  
Pull up the Document Exit Tray.  
Remove the Bypass Tray from Open the Paper Guides.  
Recording Paper Tray.  
If you raise the tray high  
enough, it will latch onto the un-  
derside of the Operation Panel.  
If you receive a mixture of  
letter and legal-size recep-  
tions, and you do not wish  
your legal receptions to be  
automatically reduced:  
•
Use of damp recording paper  
will cause poor printing over  
all or part of the image area.  
If the paper is excessively  
moist, print quality may be-  
come uneven and voiding  
may occur. Replace the pa-  
per, should this condition ex-  
ist.  
CAUTION:  
•
Do not place heavy objects  
on the Document Exit Tray  
or apply strong force.  
Add an optional recording  
paper tray to support both  
letter and legal-size paper.  
With the second recording  
paper tray, your TOSHIBA  
facsimile will automatically  
select the appropriate paper  
size to match the pages you  
receive.  
•
Do not add paper on top of  
the paper already in the ma-  
chine. If you wish to add pa-  
per, first remove the existing  
paper. Then stack the exist-  
ing paper with the new paper  
before inserting into the ma-  
chine.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording Paper Installation (Recording Paper Tray) - continued  
Replace the Bypass  
Tray and Document  
Exit Tray  
Prepare Recording  
Paper Sheets  
Install the  
Recording Paper  
Adjust the Paper  
Guides  
Display the Paper  
Size Menu  
4
5
6
7
8
Press:  
+
+
+
+
32  
33  
34  
36  
Prepare new recording paper  
sheets by holding both ends  
and flexing several times.  
Place the recording paper stack  
into the tray.  
Adjust the Paper Guides to fit Replace the Bypass Tray and  
the size of the Recording Paper.  
Document Exit Tray.  
This will separate the sheets  
and provide optimum feeding.  
NOTES:  
•
CAUTION:  
Do not exceed the upper  
stack limit line as this may  
cause paper mis-feeds.  
Do not place heavy objects  
on the Document Exit Tray  
or apply strong force.  
Align the stack so that all four  
corners are neatly aligned.  
•
Do not add paper on top of  
the paper already in the ma-  
chine.  
Be sure to load the recording  
paper in accordance with any  
paper manufacturer’s printing  
side instruction. Some papers  
have a preferred image side.  
This image side should be  
placed face up in the Recording  
Paper Tray.  
The menu below displays:  
PAPER SIZE (TRAY 1)  
1.LT  
2.A4  
3.LG  
NOTE:  
If you install legal size paper  
but fail to select “3.LG” at  
this point, the machine will  
think letter size paper is in-  
stalled. False “Paper Jam”  
failures will occur when the  
legal size paper is fed into  
the printer.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording Paper Installation (Recording Paper Tray) - continued  
Select the Paper  
Size  
Return to the  
Standby Mode  
9
10  
Select the paper size of the Re-  
cording Paper Tray.  
Press  
to return to the  
To select letter size, press:  
To select A4 size, press:  
To select legal size, press:  
Standby Mode.  
COMPLETED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording Paper Installation (Bypass Tray)  
Pull Up the  
Document Exit Tray  
Open the Paper  
Guides  
Insert the Recording  
Paper  
Adjust the Paper  
Guides  
Return the  
Document Exit Tray  
1
2
3
4
5
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
Pull up the Document Exit Tray.  
Open the Paper Guides.  
Insert a one sheet of paper on  
the Bypass Tray.  
Adjust the Paper Guides so that Return the Document Exit Tray  
both sides of the paper are se- to its normal position.  
cure.  
If you raised the Document Exit  
Tray high enough, it will catch  
the underside of the Operation  
Panel.  
CAUTION:  
Do not insert more than one  
sheet of paper on the By-  
pass Tray.  
CAUTION:  
Do not place heavy objects  
on the Document Exit Tray  
or apply strong force.  
It will cause a paper jam.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording Paper Installation (Optional Recording Paper Tray)  
Remove the Optional  
Recording Paper  
Tray  
Remove the  
Optional Tray Cover  
Press Down the  
Paper Pressure Plate  
Prepare Recording  
Paper Sheets  
Install the Recording  
Paper  
1
2
3
4
5
73  
74  
75  
32  
76  
Remove the Optional Recording  
Paper Tray.  
Remove the Optional Tray  
Cover.  
Press the Paper Pressure Plate Prepare new recording paper Place the recording paper stack  
down until it clicks.  
sheets by holding both ends into the tray.  
and flexing several times.  
NOTES:  
This will separate the sheets  
and provide optimum feeding.  
•
Do not exceed the upper  
stack limit line as this may  
cause paper misfeeds.  
Align the stack so that all four  
corners are neatly aligned.  
•
Make sure that the paper is  
seated under the two sepa-  
ration claws on the back side  
of tray.  
Be sure to load the recording  
paper in accordance with any  
paper manufacturer’s printing  
side instruction. Some papers  
have a preferred image side.  
This image side should be  
placed face up in the Recording  
Paper Tray.  
•
•
Be careful not to damage the  
claws of the Recording Pa-  
per Tray.  
Do not add paper on top of  
the paper already in the ma-  
chine.  
NOTE:  
There are two types of the  
Optional Recording Paper  
Tray, one for A4-size paper  
and another for letter-size  
paper. Use the Tray meeting  
your paper size.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording Paper Installation (Optional Recording Paper Tray) - continued  
Select the Paper Size  
of the Recording  
Paper Tray  
Select the Paper Size  
of the Optional  
Recording Paper Tray  
Replace the Optional  
Tray Cover  
Insert the Optional  
Recording Paper Tray  
Display the Paper  
Size Menu  
6
7
9
10  
8
Select the paper size of the Op-  
tional Recording Paper Tray.  
Select the paper size of the Re-  
cording Paper Tray.  
Press:  
To select the letter size, press:  
To select the A4 size, press:  
To select letter size, press:  
To select A4 size, press:  
To select legal size, press:  
+
+
+
+
77  
78  
Replace the Optional Paper Insert the Optional Recording  
Tray Cover.  
Paper Tray all the way into the  
machine.  
NOTE:  
As the tray is inserted, listen  
for the sound of the paper  
pressure plate moving up  
into position.  
COMPLETED  
PAPER SIZE (TRAY 2)  
1.LT  
2.A4  
The menu below displays:  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
PAPER SIZE (TRAY 1)  
1.LT  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
2.A4  
3.LG  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording Paper Installation (Optional Recording Paper Tray) - continued  
Return to the  
Standby Mode  
11  
Press  
to return to the  
Standby Mode.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Drum Unit and Toner Cartridge Installation  
Open the Top Cover  
Install the Drum Unit  
Prepare a Toner  
Cartridge  
Install the Toner Cartridge  
1
2
3
4
2
2
2
2
41  
37  
45  
39  
40  
Push the Top Cover Open But-  
ton and open the Top Cover.  
Install the Drum Unit into the Mix the Toner by shaking the Holding onto the Toner Car-  
machine, aligning the guides of Toner Cartridge back and forth.  
the unit with the grooves inside  
tridge’s handle, lower it into the  
machine. Make sure that the  
four pins (two on each side) fit  
into the grooves inside the ma-  
chine.  
NOTE:  
the machine.  
Use only specified TOSHIBA  
Color coordinate “1” labels have  
Toner Cartridges.  
been affixed to the Drum Unit  
and to the inside of the ma-  
chine. Install the Drum Unit by  
aligning these labels.  
Color coordinated “2” labels  
have been affixed to the Toner  
Cartridge and to the inside of  
the machine. Install the Toner  
Cartridge by aligning these la-  
bels.  
CAUTION:  
Hold the Toner Cartridge by  
the green handle.  
42  
Make sure the Drum Unit is in-  
serted inside the machine as far  
as it will go.  
As the Toner Cartridge is low-  
ered into the machine, its han-  
dle will rotate first to the rear of  
the machine and then to the  
front.  
The cartridge will click into place  
when it is completely installed.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Drum Unit and Toner Cartridge Installation - continued  
Close the Top Cover  
5
43  
Press down on the Top Cover  
until a “Click” is heard to ensure  
the latches engage.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
- PRINTING SUPPLIES REPLACEMENT  
Toner Cartridge Replacement  
Replacement Toner Kits for your TOSHIBA facsimile include a Ton-  
er Cartridge.  
Open the Top Cover  
Remove the Toner  
Cartridge  
Prepare a New  
Toner Cartridge  
1
2
3
Your TOSHIBA facsimile has been designed to display a two stage  
alert to replace Toner once it has been depleted.  
The first stage is a “TONER LOW” warning that alerts you that the  
Toner is low and should be replaced at your earliest convince.  
The unit will continue to receive and print facsimile messages during  
this stage.  
The second stage is a “TONER EMPTY” notice. When this message  
is displayed, the machine can no longer print documents. Recep-  
tions will be stored in memory until the Toner has been replaced.  
37  
38  
39  
Push the Top Cover Open But-  
ton and Open the Top Cover.  
Remove the Toner Cartridge.  
Remove the new Toner Car-  
tridge from its shipping carton.  
Mix the Toner by shaking the  
new Toner Cartridge back and  
forth.  
It is recommended to replace the Toner Cartridge whenever the  
“TONER LOW” message is displayed using the following procedure.  
CAUTION:  
Always hold the Toner Car-  
tridge by the green handle.  
NOTE:  
Use only specified TOSHIBA  
Toner Cartridges.  
NOTE:  
Avoid touching the toner to  
your clothing since toner  
cannot be removed easily.  
If the toner sticks to your  
clothing, immediately rinse  
out the toner with cold water.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Toner Cartridge Replacement - continued  
Install the New Toner Cartridge  
Close the Top Cover  
4
5
2
2
2
2
41  
43  
40  
Press down on the Top Cover  
until a “Click” is heard to ensure  
the latches engage.  
Holding  
onto  
the  
Toner  
Cartridge’s handle, lower it into  
the machine. Make sure that the  
four pins (two on each side) fit  
into the grooves inside the ma-  
chine.  
Color coordinated “2” labels  
have been affixed to the Toner  
Cartridge and to the inside of  
the machine. Install the Toner  
Cartridge by aligning these la-  
bels.  
42  
As the Toner Cartridge is low-  
ered into the machine, its  
handle will rotate first to the rear  
of the machine and then to the  
front.  
The cartridge will click into place  
when it is completely installed.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Drum Unit Replacement  
Replacement Drum Kits for your STORAGE NOTES:  
Open the Top Cover  
Remove the Toner Cartridge and Drum Unit  
TOSHIBA facsimile include a  
Drum Unit.  
1
2
The Drum Unit is a very im-  
portant part of this facsimile.  
Handle it with care as shown  
below.  
Your TOSHIBA facsimile has  
been designed to display a two-  
stage alert to replace the Drum  
Unit once it has been depleted.  
Keep the Drum Unit within a  
temperature range of 0-35°C  
(32-95°F) and  
range of 20-80%RH (without  
condensation).  
a
humidity  
The first stage is a “DRUM UNIT  
WARNING” that alerts you that  
the Drum Unit is near its end of  
life and should be replaced at  
your earliest convince. The unit  
will continue to receive and print  
facsimile messages during this  
stage.  
Do not store or use the Drum  
Unit in an environment where  
the temperature changes ex-  
cessively.  
37  
44  
38  
Push the Top Cover Open But- Remove the Toner Cartridge and Drum Unit.  
ton and open the Top Cover.  
CAUTION:  
Do not touch the light sensi-  
tive drum because its surface  
will be easily damaged.  
Always hold the Drum Unit and Toner Cartridge by their green  
handles. Do not expose the green drum to light for more than 3  
minutes. Never expose it to direct sunlight or touch the green  
drum. Damage or poor print quality may result.  
The second stage is the “RE-  
PLACE DRUM UNIT” notice.  
When this message is dis-  
played, the machine can no  
longer print documents. Recep-  
tions will be stored in memory  
until the Drum Unit has been  
replaced.  
Do not place the light sensi-  
tive drum in a location where  
it is exposed to direct sunlight  
or high intensity light (more  
than 200 lx) such as near a  
window.  
NOTE:  
Avoid touching the toner to your clothing since toner cannot be  
removed easily.  
If the toner sticks to your clothing, immediately rinse out the  
toner with cold water.  
For the purpose of determining  
Drum usage;  
Each legal-size sheet of paper  
counts as 1.3 letter-size sheets  
of paper.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Drum Unit Replacement - continued  
Install the New Drum  
Unit  
Install the Toner Cartridge  
Close the Top Cover  
Reset the Drum  
Counter  
3
4
5
6
Perform the following procedure  
to reset the Drum Unit counter  
after you replace the Drum Unit.  
2
2
2
2
Press:  
+
45  
41  
43  
40  
Install the new Drum Unit into Holding  
the machine, aligning the guides Cartridge’s handle, lower it into  
of the Unit with the grooves in- the machine. Make sure that the  
onto  
the  
Toner  
Press down on the Top Cover  
until a “Click” is heard to ensure  
the latches engage.  
+
+
+
side the machine.  
Color coordinated “1” labels into the grooves inside the ma-  
have been affixed to the Drum chine.  
Unit and to the inside of the ma- Color coordinated “2” labels  
chine. Install the Drum Unit by have been affixed to the Toner  
aligning these labels.  
four pins (two on each side) fit  
Cartridge and to the inside of  
the machine. Install the Toner  
Cartridge by aligning these la-  
bels.  
42  
Make sure the Drum Unit is in-  
serted inside the machine as far  
as it will go.  
As the Toner Cartridge is low-  
ered into the machine, its  
handle will rotate first to the rear  
of the machine and then to the  
front.  
IMPORTANT:  
•
Never touch the photocon-  
ductive drum (the green sur-  
face) of the Drum Unit. If the  
RESET DRUM COUNT  
2.NO  
surface  
scratched, it will cause print  
quality problems.  
is  
scarred  
or  
The cartridge will click into place  
when it is completely installed.  
1.YES  
•
Do not expose the photocon-  
ductive drum of the Drum  
Unit to light for more than 3  
minutes. If the Drum Unit is  
to be left anywhere outside  
the facsimile, be certain to  
cover it with cloth, paper,  
etc.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Drum Unit Replacement - continued  
Reset the Drum  
Counter - continued  
Return to the  
Standby Mode  
6
7
Press:  
Press  
to return to the  
Standby Mode.  
RESET DRUM COUNT  
ARE YOU SURE ?  
Press:  
COMPLETED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Return to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
NOTE:  
You must reset the drum  
counter when you replace  
the Drum Unit.  
Never perform this operation  
on any other occasion.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
- QUICK START  
This section provides several  
quick start programming steps  
to prepare your new facsimile  
for immediate use.  
Terminal ID  
Receiving  
Receiving a  
Transmitting  
Setting the Terminal ID (Page 42)  
Sending a Facsimile  
1
2
3
(Page 93)  
Facsimile (Page 104)  
These procedures are a simple  
version of the detailed proce-  
dures listed in the manual. Next  
to each procedure heading is a  
convenient page number refer-  
ence for the detailed procedure.  
Should you have any difficulty  
with these simple procedures,  
refer to the pages listed for  
more information.  
Load your document face down Your TOSHIBA facsimile has  
FAX NUMBER (20MAX)  
into the Document Support.  
been preset from the factory to  
receive facsimile messages. No  
special setup is required to re-  
ceive facsimile messages.  
Press:  
,
,
[
]
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
Enter your facsimile’s telephone  
number, press:  
NAME  
[
(40MAX)  
]
Dial the remote facsimile using  
the Dial Keypad located on the  
Operation Panel. Remember to  
include any access numbers  
Enter your user ID (company  
name) using the Numeric Key-  
pad, press:  
It is highly recommended that  
you take the time to read  
through this manual to get the  
most from your new TOSHIBA  
facsimile.  
COMPLETED  
such as 9 or press the  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
after the access number if you  
normally have to wait for a dial  
tone.  
COUNTRY CODE  
1.YES  
INITIAL SETUP  
3.TERMINAL ID  
2.NO  
If you communicate internation-  
ally, select:  
Press:  
Otherwise, select:  
After the remote facsimile num-  
ber has been entered into the  
keypad, press the green START  
key.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
- USER INTERFACE OPERATION  
Menu Operation  
Various functions of this fac-  
Keys Used in Menu Operation  
simile can be used by selecting  
menu items displayed in the  
LCD window. Performing opera-  
tions or settings by selecting  
menu items is called “Menu Op-  
eration.” The menus use a multi-  
layered structure.  
[
[
[
[
] Key  
Press this key to enter the Menu Operation or to scroll up the menu selections.  
] Key  
Starting Menu Operation:  
When the facsimile is in the  
Press this key to scroll down the menu selections.  
] Key  
Standby Mode, press  
start Menu Operation.  
to  
Press this key to display the preceding menu screen or to move the cursor to the left.  
(In the Standby Mode, the dis-  
play shows the date, time and  
residual memory % on the first  
row and the receive mode on  
the second row as shown be-  
] Key  
Press this key to display the sub-menu screen or to move the cursor to the right.  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
[ENTER] Key or [START] Key  
or  
When the displayed item has sub-items, pressing this key operates the same as the [ ] Key.  
When the displayed item is the end item, press this key to complete the item selection.  
low.  
Dial Keypad [1] to [0] Keys  
Completing or Canceling  
Menu Operation:  
Used to enter desired information or to select options.  
When you have reached the  
end of a programming step or  
wish to cancel a programming  
procedure, press  
to re-  
turn to the Standby Mode.  
[STOP] Key  
Used to exit the Menu Operation and return to the Standby Mode.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Character Entry  
When programming and regis-  
tering the Autodialer numbers or  
names, you will need to enter al-  
phanumeric characters.  
Keys Used in Character Entry  
Entry Procedure  
[INSERT] Key  
This section helps you under-  
stand how to easily enter the  
characters.  
NAME  
[
(20 MAX)  
An example to enter “NEW YORK”:  
Inserts characters before the selected  
(underlined) character.  
]
[DELETE] Key  
Press  
twice to display “N.” Note that “M” was dis-  
Deletes the selected (underlined) charac-  
ter.  
played on the first press followed by “N” on the second.  
NOTE: If the next character is located on the same key  
[
[
] Key  
as the preceding character, press the  
key to  
Moves the cursor to the right. If pressed  
without entering a character, it inserts a  
space.  
move the cursor to the next position. Otherwise  
press the next desired key and the cursor will  
automatically move to the right.  
] Key  
NAME  
[N  
(20 MAX)  
Moves the cursor to the left.  
Press  
NAME  
3 times for Y.  
]
(20 MAX)  
]
The dial keypad is used to enter alpha-  
numeric characters. Both U.S. and Foreign  
alphanumeric characters may be selected  
with each Numeric Key. The U.S. characters  
are listed for your convenience above each  
key. By pressing the Numeric Key multiple  
times, you can scroll through all characters  
assigned to a particular key (see table below).  
[NEW Y  
Press  
Press  
Press  
2 times for E.  
NAME  
[NE  
(20 MAX)  
]
Press  
3 times for O.  
NAME  
[NEW YO  
(20 MAX)  
]
1 time for W.  
NAME  
[NEW  
(20 MAX)  
]
Press  
3 times for R.  
NAME  
[NEW YOR  
(20 MAX)  
]
2 times to  
insert a blank space.  
Press  
2 times for K.  
NAME  
[NEW  
(20 MAX)  
]
NAME  
[NEW YORK  
(20 MAX)  
]
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Character Entry - continued  
Character Correction  
Replacing Characters  
Inserting Characters  
NAME  
[NEW YOPK  
(20 MAX)  
]
NAME  
[NEW YRK  
(20 MAX)  
]
Using  
/
, position the cursor under the char-  
Using  
/
, position the cursor under the  
acter to be corrected.  
point of insertion and press  
.
The message “[ I ]” is displayed on the right end of  
the second row.  
Input the correct character (“R” in this example) by  
NAME  
[NEW YORK  
(20 MAX)  
]
NAME  
[NEW YRK  
(20 MAX)  
]I  
pressing  
change.  
3 times. Press  
to save your  
Enter the desired character(s) (“O” in this example).  
The character(s) will be inserted without deleting  
Deleting Characters  
NAME  
[NEW YORK  
(20 MAX)  
]I  
NAME  
[NEEW YORK  
(20 MAX)  
]
other characters in the line. Press  
your change.  
to save  
Using  
/
, position the cursor under the char-  
acter to be deleted.  
Delete the character by pressing  
to save your change.  
. Press  
NAME  
[NEW YORK  
(20 MAX)  
]
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
- INITIAL SETUP  
Initial Setting Summary  
This facsimile has several user  
initial settings.  
Enter the  
Configuration Menu  
Select the Desired Initial Setting (1-4)  
1
2
For your convenience, a quick  
reference summary of all user  
initial settings is shown on the  
right.  
Press  
or  
until the desired Initial Setting is displayed or enter the desired Initial Setting 1  
Press  
. The initial Menu  
Screen displays.  
through 4 from the list below. The detailed initial setting procedure for each setting is shown in  
parentheses after the initial setting.  
Each of these initial settings is  
discussed in detail throughout  
the remainder of this section.  
MENU  
1.FAX FEATURES  
1. LANGUAGE - (Page 39) - Selects ENGLISH*, FRENCH or SPANISH display and printing.  
Use the following procedures to  
access one or more of these ini-  
tial settings.  
2. DATE & TIME - (Page 40) - Sets the Month, Day, Year & Time for your machine. You may select to  
use the 24-hour or the 12-hour format for the time.  
Press  
to enter INITIAL  
3. TERMINAL ID - FCC MANDATORY - (Page 42) - Sets the Terminal ID (Company Name &  
Facsimile Number) for your machine.  
SETUP. The Installation sub-  
menu displays.  
4. DIAL TYPE - (Page 44) - Configures your machine for use with Touch Tone (MF)* or Rotary Dial  
(DP) telephone service.  
INITIAL SETUP  
1.LANGUAGE  
NOTE: * indicates the factory default setting.  
2.DATE & TIME  
3.TERMINAL ID  
4.DIAL TYPE  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Language Selection  
You can select the language  
used on the LCD display and all  
reports printed by your fac-  
Display the  
LANGUAGE Menu  
Select the Desired  
Language  
1
2
simile.  
English, French, and  
Spanish are available.  
Display  
INITIAL SETUP  
Select the desired language.  
To display the SETUP menu,  
press:  
1.LANGUAGE  
(for ENGLISH)  
Using  
press:  
or  
and  
+
(for ESPANOL)  
or  
(for FRANCAIS)  
COMPLETED  
LANGUAGE  
1.ENGLISH  
INITIAL SETUP  
1.LANGUAGE  
Returns to display the Standby  
menu screen.  
2.ESPAÑOL  
3.FRANÇAIS  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Date and Time Setting  
This facsimile displays the cur-  
Display the DATE &  
TIME Menu  
Enter the Date Data  
Select the Date  
Format  
Select the Month  
Format  
rent date and time when in the  
Standby Mode. It also uses this  
time for maintaining internal list  
and reports. Follow this proce-  
dure to set the time and date.  
2
3
1
4
Move the cursor to the desired Select the date format for dis-  
position using the following play and print.  
keys.  
Select the month format.  
Display  
INITIAL SETUP  
2.DATE & TIME  
To display the SETUP menu,  
press:  
or  
(for NUMERIC, such as 01, 02,  
03 ...)  
(for Month/Day/Year 4-digit)  
Enter the date.  
Using  
press:  
or  
and  
+
(for Day/Month/Year 4-digit)  
(for NAME, such as JAN, FEB,  
MAR ...)  
or  
(for Year 4-digit/Month/Day)  
When the correct date is en-  
tered, press:  
INITIAL SETUP  
1.LANGUAGE  
DATE  
[04-15-2000]  
MONTH FORMAT  
2.NAME  
TIME FORMAT  
2.12 HOUR  
1.NUMERIC  
1.24 HOUR  
DATE FORMAT  
1.MM-DD-YYYY  
2.DD-MM-YYYY  
3.YYYY-MM-DD  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Date and Time Setting - continued  
Select the Time  
Format  
Enter the Time Data  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
5
6
7
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other settings referring  
to their associated pages for in-  
structions, or press  
Select the time format.  
Move the cursor to the desired  
position using the following  
keys.  
or  
(for 24-hour format)  
Enter the time.  
TIME  
[09:43]  
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
(for 12-hour format) default  
TIME  
[09:43AM]  
Change the AM/PM designation  
by pressing the following keys.  
or  
When the correct time is en-  
tered, press:  
COMPLETED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Terminal ID Setting  
In compliance with FCC regula-  
tions (see page 1), this facsimile  
places your company’s name,  
facsimile telephone number and  
date & time on top of all trans-  
mitted documents. This feature  
enables remote parties to easily  
identify your documents and  
time of transmission.  
Display the  
TERMINAL ID Menu  
Enter the User ID  
Select the  
International Code  
Enter Your  
Telephone Number  
1
2
3
4
Enter your user ID (company If you send documents over- If you selected YES in Step 3,  
name) using the Numeric Key- seas, adding your International enter the International Code for  
pad. You can use up to 40 char- Code (country code) to your your country before entering  
Display  
INITIAL SETUP  
3.TERMINAL ID  
acters.  
stored ID name will enable the your area code and telephone  
For more information on select- remote party to identify the number.  
ing characters, see page 34, country from which the docu-  
Character Entry.  
Example: United States = 1  
Using  
press:  
or  
and  
ment has been sent. The 1st  
digit(s) following the “+” sign is  
for the International Code.  
To display the SETUP menu,  
press:  
Then, enter the telephone num-  
ber that has been connected to  
the facsimile.  
When your ID name is displayed  
correctly on the LCD display,  
press:  
If you send or receive docu-  
ments to and from overseas,  
press:  
+
or  
Your facsimile will prompt you  
for your telephone number’s in-  
ternational code.  
If all of your documents are sent  
domestically, press:  
INITIAL SETUP  
1.LANGUAGE  
NAME  
[
(40MAX)  
COUNTRY CODE  
1.YES  
]
Check the LCD display to make  
sure your telephone number  
appears correctly, then press:  
2.NO  
If the terminal ID is already set,  
the current name is displayed  
on the second row.  
FAX NUMBER (20MAX)  
[+  
]
NAME  
[DP80F/DP85F  
(40MAX)  
]
The “+” is displayed when Inter-  
national Code is selected.  
COMPLETED  
The new name will be displayed  
on the second row as it is en-  
tered.  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Terminal ID Setting - continued  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
5
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other settings referring  
to their associated pages for in-  
structions, or press  
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dial Type Setting  
There are two types of dialing  
modes: DP [Dial Pulse (Rotary)]  
and MF [Multi-Frequency (touch  
tone)]. If your telephone emits  
tones when you are dialing, this  
usually indicates that you have  
a MF type line and no adjust-  
ment is required. Otherwise, you  
will have to select the appropri-  
ate setting.  
Display the DIAL  
TYPE Menu  
Select Your Dial  
Type  
Enter the Access  
Digits  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
1
2
3
4
Display  
Select your dial line type.  
PBX Access Digits such as 9,  
pause, and 1 need to be omitted  
when using chain dialing.  
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other settings referring  
to their associated pages for in-  
structions, or press  
INITIAL SETUP  
4.DIAL TYPE  
If you will not be using the Chain  
(for Multi-Frequency type)  
default  
Dial feature, press  
skip this step.  
to  
Using  
press:  
or  
and  
To display the SETUP menu,  
press:  
Otherwise, enter the Access  
Digits to be deleted (max. 10  
digits) using the Dial Keypad.  
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
(for Dial Pulse type)  
+
After selecting the dial type, the  
following will be displayed.  
or  
DELETE ACCESS DIGIT  
[
]
INITIAL SETUP  
1.LANGUAGE  
DIAL TYPE  
1.TONE  
Access digits are numbers  
which are required by PBX sys-  
tems to access the phone sys-  
tem “outside” the PBX. A com-  
mon access digit is “9.”  
2.PULSE  
When the correct Access Digit is  
displayed, press:  
COMPLETED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
- DEVICE CONFIGURATION  
Configuration Summary  
This facsimile has many user  
adjustable settings.  
Enter the  
Configuration Menu  
Select the Desired Configuration Setting (01-11)  
2
1
Each of these configuration set-  
tings is discussed in detail  
throughout the remainder of this  
section.  
Press  
. The initial Menu  
Press  
or  
until the desired Configuration Setting is displayed or enter the desired  
Screen displays.  
Configuration Setting 01 through 11 from the list below. The detailed configuration procedure for each  
setting is shown in parentheses after the configuration setting.  
Use the following procedures to  
access one or more of these  
configuration settings.  
MENU  
1.FAX FEATURES  
01. SPEAKER VOLUME - (Page 46) - Sets the Bell Ringer, Alarm Tone, Key Touch Tone and  
Monitor volume (0-7) (5*) for the machine.  
02. POWER SAVER - (Page 50) - Configures the machine’s Super Power Saver function for Auto-  
Press  
to enter DEFAULT  
matic/Manual* or Off operation and Printer Power Saver function for On or Off.  
SETTINGS. The Default Set-  
tings sub-menu displays.  
03. DEPARTMENT CODE - (Page 52) - Enables, Disables* and Configures up to 50 Department  
Codes.  
DEFAULT SETTINGS  
1.MACHINE SETTINGS  
04. ACCOUNT CODE - (Page 56) - Enables or Disables* a 4-digit Account Code entry.  
05. LINE MONITOR - (Page 57) - Enables or Disables* a Line Monitor function.  
Press  
to enter MACHINE  
06. RECEIVE INTERVAL - (Page 58) - Sets an interval for the machine to wait (0 - 14 min.) after  
SETTINGS. The Machine Set-  
tings sub-menu will now be dis-  
played.  
making four consecutive dialings.  
07. ECM - (Page 59) - Enables or Disables* an ECM function.  
MACHINE SETTINGS  
01.SPEAKER VOLUME  
08. SORT COPY - (Page 60) - Enables or Disables* a Sort Copy function.  
09. REDIAL MODE - (Page 61) - Sets the number of redials (0-14) (5*) and redial interval (1min.-  
02.POWER SAVER  
03.DEPARTMENT CODE  
04.ACCOUNT CODE  
05.LINE MONITOR  
06.RECEIVE INTERVAL  
07.ECM  
15min.) (1*min.).  
10. RECEPTION MODE - (Page 62) - Configures FAX*, FAX/TAD, TEL/FAX or Manual reception  
modes.  
08.SORT COPY  
11. COPY REDUCTION - (Page 64) - Configures the machine’s Copy Reduction function for Auto or  
09.REDIAL MODE  
10.RECEPTION MODE  
11.COPY REDUCTION  
Off* operation.  
NOTE: * indicates the factory default setting.  
NOTE: Only 1 selection can be  
displayed at one time.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ringer Volume Adjustment  
The bell ringer volume can be  
adjusted using the following pro-  
cedure.  
Display the RINGER  
VOLUME Menu  
Enter the Desired  
Volume Value  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
1
2
3
Press:  
Enter the desired volume value  
(1 to 8; 1 for maximum, 7 for  
minimum, 8 for off).  
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other volume settings  
referring to their associated  
pages for instructions, or press  
+
+
+
+
+
+
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
or  
Select the desired volume  
value, using the following keys.  
or  
When the desired value is dis-  
played, press:  
COMPLETED  
The current setting is displayed  
on the bottom row.  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
RINGER VOLUME  
5.>>>  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alarm Tone Volume Adjustment  
The alarm tone volume can be  
adjusted using the following pro-  
cedure.  
Display the ALARM  
VOLUME Menu  
Enter the Desired  
Volume Value  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
1
2
3
Press:  
Enter the desired volume value  
(1 to 8; 1 for maximum, 7 for  
minimum, 8 for off).  
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other volume settings  
referring to their associated  
pages for instructions, or press  
+
+
+
+
+
+
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
or  
Select the desired volume  
value, using the following keys.  
or  
When the desired value is dis-  
played, press:  
COMPLETED  
The current setting is displayed  
on the bottom row.  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
ALARM VOLUME  
5.>>>  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Key Touch Tone Volume Adjustment  
The key touch tone volume can  
Display the KEY  
Enter the Desired  
Volume Value  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
be adjusted using the following  
1
2
3
TOUCH VOLUME  
procedure.  
Menu  
Press:  
Enter the desired volume value  
(1 to 8; 1 for maximum, 7 for  
minimum, 8 for off).  
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other volume settings  
referring to their associated  
pages for instructions, or press  
+
+
+
+
+
+
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
or  
Select the desired volume  
value, using the following keys.  
or  
When the desired value is dis-  
played, press:  
COMPLETED  
The current setting is displayed  
on the bottom row.  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
KEY TOUCH VOLUME  
5.>>>  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Monitor Volume Adjustment  
The line monitor volume can be  
adjusted using the following pro-  
cedure.  
Display the MONITOR  
VOLUME Menu  
Enter the Desired  
Volume Value  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
1
2
3
Press:  
Enter the desired volume value  
(1 to 8; 1 for maximum, 7 for  
minimum, 8 for off).  
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other volume settings  
referring to their associated  
pages for instructions, or press  
+
+
+
+
+
+
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
or  
Select the desired volume  
value, using the following keys.  
or  
When the desired value is dis-  
played, press:  
COMPLETED  
The current setting is displayed  
on the bottom row.  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
MONITOR VOLUME  
5.>>>  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power Saver Operation  
This function allows you to mini-  
Display the POWER  
SAVER Menu  
Select the Power  
Saver Mode  
Select the Super  
Power Saver Option  
Enter the Start Time  
Period  
mize power consumption by  
turning power off to portions of  
the machine (as selected). If  
the Power Saver function is ON,  
a warm up period is needed be-  
fore printing occurs. This fac-  
simile has two Power Saver  
modes, Super Power Saver and  
Printer Power Saver.  
Super Power Saver turns virtu-  
ally all power off to minimize  
power consumption. Select one  
of three modes, Automatic,  
Manual or OFF.  
2
1
3
4
Press:  
Select the desired Power Saver  
Mode.  
Select the desired Super Power  
Saver Option.  
Enter the time period (in min-  
utes) for standby operation prior  
to entering the Super Power  
Saver mode.  
+
+
+
+
+
(to select Super Power  
Saver mode)  
(to select Automatic mode)  
SUPER P.S.  
2.MANUAL  
ENTER TIME  
(1-60)  
[ 3]  
Printer Power Saver turns only  
the fuser section off during the  
time period selected.  
3.OFF  
Go to Step 4.  
1.AUTOMATIC  
ENTER TIME  
Go to Step 3.  
NOTE:  
(1-60)  
[ 3]  
When the machine is in the  
Super Power Saver mode, it  
will exit from the Super  
Power Saver mode when  
any of the following occurs.  
(to select Manual mode)  
+
When the correct time period is  
displayed, press:  
In manual mode, you can acti-  
vate Super Power Saver using a  
key on the Operation Panel.  
(to select Printer Power  
Saver mode)  
POWER SAVER  
01.SUPER P.S.  
-
The machine receives a  
facsimile,  
Go to Step 7.  
02.PRINTER P.S.  
PRINTER P.S.  
1.ON  
-
Option handset or exter-  
nal telephone handset is  
lifted,  
COMPLETED  
2.OFF  
(to select OFF)  
Go to Step 7.  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
-
Document is loaded into  
the document tray,  
Go to Step 5.  
-
-
is pressed, or  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
PC has accessed the  
machine.  
Go to Step 7.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power Saver Operation - continued  
Select the Printer Power Saver Function  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
Enter the Start Time  
and End Time  
5
7
6
Enable or Disable the Printer  
Power Saver function.  
Move the cursor to the desired After completing this Configura-  
position, using the following tion Setting, press  
keys.  
START/STOP TIME  
[12:00AM-12:00AM]  
(Example if the 12-hour format  
option is selected in DATE &  
TIME setting)  
or  
(to set Printer Power Saver ON)  
(to set Printer Power Saver OFF)  
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
Enter the time period.  
When “OFF” is selected, the  
“COMPLETED” message is dis-  
played as shown at the bottom  
in Step 6. Returns to Step 1.  
If “ON” is selected, the currently  
set time period is displayed be-  
low. The time on the left is the  
Printer Power Saver start time  
(or time that the printer unit will  
power down). The time on the  
right is the Printer Power Saver  
end time.  
Change the AM/PM designation  
if selected by pressing the fol-  
lowing keys.  
or  
START/STOP TIME  
[00:00-00:00]  
When the correct time period is  
displayed, press:  
(Example if the 24-hour format  
option is selected in DATE &  
TIME setting)  
COMPLETED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
The display returns to Step 1.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Department Code Setting  
Department Code operation is  
Display the  
DEPARTMENT CODE  
Menu  
Enable/Disable the Department Code  
Enter the Master  
Department Name  
used to monitor the facsimiles  
activity when shared between  
multiple users or workgroups.  
1
2
3
Press:  
Enable or Disable the Depart- If Department Code has ever  
Department Code NBR. 01 is  
fixed as the Master Department  
Code. Enter the Master Depart-  
ment Name. See page 36 if you  
need help selecting characters.  
This feature is especially useful  
when billing departments based  
on machine usage.  
ment Code function.  
been set before, the following  
screen is displayed.  
+
+
+
+
When Department Code opera-  
tion is enabled, access to the  
facsimile is restricted to 50 valid  
department code passwords.  
SET DEPT. CODE  
1.RECOVER SETTING  
(for YES-Enable)  
When the name is correctly dis-  
played on the LCD display,  
press:  
2.NEW  
Each department code will be  
assigned a 5-digit department  
code password. These pass-  
words must be entered each  
time a user wishes to send a  
facsimile, make copy, print a de-  
partment journal, etc.  
To recover previously set De-  
partment Codes, press:  
(for NO-Disable)  
If “YES” is selected, the follow-  
ing Master Code Name Entry  
screen is displayed.  
MASTER CODE  
[
]
Go to Step 5.  
There are two types of Depart-  
ment Codes, Master and Indi-  
vidual. The Master Code is used  
as a supervisor level code to  
add, delete and modify Indi-  
vidual Codes.  
To set a new Department code,  
press:  
NAME  
[
]
SET DEPT. CODE  
2.NO  
If “NO” is selected, “COM-  
PLETED” will be displayed.  
1.YES  
Go to Step 3.  
The Master Code is also used to  
print the Department Code List  
and Master Journals that con-  
tain all machine activity.  
COMPLETED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
The Individual Codes are used  
to gain an access to basic ma-  
chine functions and operations.  
These Department Codes can  
be used to print Journals which  
only show the activity under that  
code.  
Returns to the Standby mode.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Department Code Setting - continued  
Enter the Master  
Department Code  
Password  
Enter the Individual  
Department Code  
Address  
Enter the Individual  
Department Code  
Name  
Enter the Department  
Code Password  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
4
5
6
7
8
Department Codes NBR. 02  
through 50 are used as Indi-  
vidual Department Codes. Enter  
the Individual Department Code  
name using the Dial keypad.  
See page 36 if you need help  
selecting characters.  
When the name is correctly dis-  
played on the LCD display,  
press:  
Enter a 5-digit Master Depart-  
ment Code Password using the  
Dial Keypad. This password will  
be required to gain supervisor  
access to the machine.  
After entering the Master De-  
partment Code password, the  
facsimile will prompt for an Indi-  
vidual Department Code ad-  
dress.  
Enter  
a
5-digit Department If you want to continue entering  
Codes, repeat  
Code Password using the Dial Department  
Keypad. This password will be Steps 5 through 7.  
required to gain user/depart-  
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
ment access to the machine.  
Select an Individual Department  
Code address from 02 to 50.  
Important: Record the pass-  
word in a safe location so that if  
it is lost or forgotten it can be  
retrieved.  
Important: Record this pass- to select other settings referring  
word in a safe location so that if to their associated pages for in-  
it is lost or forgotten it can be structions, or press:  
retrieved.  
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
After selecting the Individual De-  
partment Code address, press:  
When the password is correctly  
entered, press:  
When the password is correctly  
entered, press:  
DEPT. NUMBER  
NAME  
DEPT. CODE  
COMPLETED  
(1-50)  
[ ]  
[
]
[
]
Displayed for 2 seconds  
DEPT. NUMBER  
(1-50)  
[ ]  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Department Code Maintenance  
The Department Code Mainte-  
nance is used to cancel or  
change the Master or Individual  
Department Code.  
Display the  
Enter the Master or  
Individual Department  
Code Address  
Enable/Disable the  
Department Code  
Select the Desired  
Option  
1
2
3
4
DEPARTMENT  
CODE Menu  
Press:  
Enable or Disable the Depart- Select a Master or Individual Select the desired option.  
This procedure can only be per-  
formed by a supervisor who  
possesses the Master Depart-  
ment Code function.  
Department Code address from  
1 to 50.  
Press:  
ment Code Password. Enter this  
password before proceeding.  
+
+
+
+
(for YES-Enable)  
To delete the previously dis-  
played Department Code and  
return to the Department Code  
Address Entry menu in Step 4 of  
Department Code Setting. (See  
page 53.)  
(for NO-Disable)  
NOTE: Disabling Department  
Codes will delete all  
information related to  
the Department Codes  
stored.  
After selecting the Individual De-  
partment Code address, press:  
To change the previously dis-  
played Department Code and  
return to Step 5 of Department  
Code Setting. (See page 53.)  
If “YES” is selected, the follow-  
ing Master Code Menu is dis-  
played.  
SET DEPT. CODE  
1.YES  
DEPT. NUMBER  
(1-50)  
DEPT. NUMBER  
3.RETAIN  
2
[ ]  
To retain the previously dis-  
played Department Code with-  
out modification and return to  
the Department Code Address  
Entry menu in Step 4 of Depart-  
ment Code Setting. (See page  
53.)  
2.NO  
1.DELETE  
2.MODIFY  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Department Code Maintenance - continued  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
5
If you wish to continue, repeat  
Steps 2 and 3.  
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other settings referring  
to their associated pages for in-  
structions, or press  
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Account Codes Setting  
This feature provides valuable  
Account Code tracking informa-  
tion for each facsimile transmis-  
sion sent from the unit.  
Display the  
ACCOUNT CODE  
Menu  
Select the Function  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
1
2
3
Press:  
Enable or Disable Account  
Codes.  
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other settings referring  
to their associated pages for in-  
structions, or press  
When a facsimile is transmitted,  
the account code number will be  
recorded on the Transmission  
Journal.  
+
+
+
+
Select ON to enable Account  
Code prompting and printing on  
the Transmission Journal.  
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
Or, select OFF to disable Ac-  
count Codes from being prompt-  
ed and printed on the Transmis-  
sion Journal.  
ACCOUNT CODE  
2.OFF  
COMPLETED  
1.ON  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Line Monitor Default Setting  
This function is used to set the  
speaker ON in order to monitor  
every transmission.  
Display the LINE  
MONITOR Menu  
Select the Line  
Monitor Option  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
1
2
3
This function is mainly used to  
confirm dialing and phone line  
status.  
Press:  
To turn ON the monitor speaker,  
press:  
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other settings referring  
to their associated pages for in-  
structions, or press  
+
+
+
+
To turn OFF the monitor  
speaker, press:  
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
LINE MONITOR  
2.OFF  
COMPLETED  
1.ALWAYS  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Receive Interval Setting Operation  
This function insures there will  
Display the RECEIVE  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
Enter the Receive  
Interval  
be a period of time set aside for  
receiving incoming facsimiles  
during periods of heavy out go-  
ing transmission activity. After  
every fourth consecutive trans-  
mission, this machine will wait 0  
to 14 minutes to allow incoming  
facsimiles to be received (de-  
fault is 3 minutes).  
1
3
2
INTERVAL Menu  
Press:  
Enter the interval value (0 to 14)  
in minutes.  
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other settings referring  
to their associated pages for in-  
structions, or press  
+
+
+
+
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
Then press:  
INTERVAL TIME  
(0-14)  
COMPLETED  
[ 3]  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ECM Default Setting  
ECM (Error Correction Mode) is  
an internationally-recognized er-  
ror correction system. It enables  
error free communications by  
automatically re-sending any  
portion of the document affected  
by phone line noise or distor-  
tion.  
Display the SET  
ECM Menu  
Select the ECM  
Option  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
1
2
3
Press:  
Select the desired ECM option.  
To turn ECM to ON, press:  
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other settings referring  
to their associated pages for in-  
structions, or press  
+
+
+
+
NOTES:  
•
Default ECM setting is  
ON.  
To turn ECM to OFF, press:  
•
Both the sender and the  
receiver must have the  
ECM feature to perform  
ECM communications.  
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
COMPLETED  
•
This setting cannot be  
changed if a document is  
stored in memory. Re-  
sidual memory must be  
100%.  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
ECM  
1.ON  
2.OFF  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sort Copy Setting  
When copying documents, the SORT function may be selected.  
This function will sort multiple page copies into sets of correct-order  
pages.  
Display the SORT  
COPY Menu  
Select the Desired  
Option  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
1
2
3
This setting establishes the default for the Sort Copy function. Sort  
copy may, also, be set manually at the time the copy operation is  
performed.  
Select the desired option.  
Press:  
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other settings referring  
to their associated pages for in-  
structions, or press  
To set SORT COPY to ON,  
press:  
Output Examples of Printed Copies  
+
+
+
+
With SORT Function ON  
With SORT Function OFF  
To set SORT COPY to OFF,  
press:  
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
Page 1  
Page 1  
Page 3  
Page 2  
Page 1  
Page 1  
Page 3  
Page 2  
Page 2  
Page 1  
Page 3  
Page 2  
Page 2  
Page 3  
Page 2  
Page 1  
Page 3  
Page 3  
COMPLETED  
NOTES:  
NOTES:  
• The pages are automatical-  
ly sorted.  
• Sorting is the responsibility  
of the operator.  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
SORT COPY  
2.OFF  
• Requires enough memory  
for the entire multi-page  
document. If there is not  
enough memory (memory  
overflow), the copying pro-  
cedure will be canceled.  
• Memory requirements are  
limited to one page at a  
time.  
1.ON  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
• Collation is slower than  
non-collation because the  
entire document must be  
scanned into memory first,  
then printing can occur.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Redial (Interval and Counter)  
If the destination facsimile you  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
Display the REDIAL  
MODE Menu  
Enter the Redial  
Interval  
Enter the Redial  
Counter  
called is busy, your facsimile will  
automatically redial the number  
up to the number of attempts set  
by this procedure. In addition,  
your DP80F/DP85F will try to re-  
dial every 1 minute by default. If  
desired, you may change these  
redial settings.  
4
1
2
3
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other settings referring  
to their associated pages for in-  
structions, or press  
Press:  
Enter the interval value (1 to 15)  
in minutes.  
Enter the redial counter value (0  
to 14).  
+
+
+
+
Redial Interval  
The Redial Interval sets the  
length of time between redial at-  
tempts. The default redial inter-  
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
val is  
1
minute. You may  
change the interval from 1 to 15  
minutes.  
Then press:  
Then press:  
Redial Counter  
The Redial Counter sets the  
number of redial attempts. The  
default setting is 5. You may  
change the number of redials  
from 0 to 14 attempts.  
The following screen is dis-  
played.  
The following screen is dis-  
played.  
INTERVAL (MINUTES)  
(1-15) [ 1]  
REDIAL COUNT  
(0-14)  
COMPLETED  
[ 5]  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reception Mode Default Setting  
The DP80F/DP85F have four TEL/FAX:  
reception modes and the receiv- This mode is used when the line  
ing function differs according to is used for both facsimile and  
Select the Desired Reception Mode  
Display the Reception  
Mode Menu  
2
1
the selected mode.  
telephone functions.  
The facsimile automatically de-  
termines whether an incoming  
call is for facsimile or telephone.  
When the call is for telephone,  
the ringer will ring according to  
the value set for the call time.  
When the call is for facsimile,  
the machine will automatically  
start receiving the document.  
Press:  
Select the desired Reception  
Mode.  
• AUTO RECEIVE  
• TEL/FAX  
• FAX/TAD  
• MANUAL RECEIVE  
+
+
+
+
(for TEL/FAX RECEIVE)  
(for AUTO RECEIVE)  
AUTO RECEIVE (FAX):  
If you use the unit as a facsimile  
most of the time, you should se-  
lect this mode. When the unit re-  
ceives a call, the unit enters the  
automatic fax reception mode  
after the selected ring delay.  
If AUTO RECEIVE is selected,  
the following will be displayed.  
TEL/FAX RINGS  
(1-15)  
[ 6]  
MANUAL:  
This mode is used when the fac-  
simile is connected to a line that  
is primarily used as a (voice)  
telephone line.  
Upon receiving a ring-in signal,  
pick up the handset to talk with  
the remote party before starting  
a facsimile communication.  
RINGS TO ANSWER  
(1-10)  
[ 2]  
Go to Step 5.  
Go to Step 3.  
FAX/TAD  
This mode is used together with  
a TAD (telephone answering de-  
vice/machine).  
This mode allows you to receive  
voice messages and facsimile  
receptions even when no one is  
present in the office.  
Switching between the voice  
message recording and fac-  
simile receiving is performed au-  
tomatically.  
(for FAX/TAD RECEIVE)  
(for MANUAL RECEIVE)  
NOTE:  
Manual Reception must be  
initiated by an operator. No  
facsimile receiving opera-  
tions will be possible if no  
one is present to initiate the  
reception.  
If MANUAL RECEIVE is se-  
lected, the following will be dis-  
played for 2 seconds (continue  
to Step 6).  
RECEPTION MODE  
1.FAX  
FAX/TAD TIMER  
(0-99)  
[45]  
2.FAX/TAD  
3.TEL/FAX  
4.MANUAL  
Go to Step 4.  
COMPLETED  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reception Mode Default Setting - continued  
Enter the FAX Ring  
Delay  
Enter the FAX  
Monitor Time  
Enter the Pseudo  
Ring Delay  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
3
4
5
6
Enter the desired number of Enter the desired Fax Monitor  
rings (1 to 10) before the fac- Time (00 to 99). During this pe-  
simile will answer the incoming riod, the facsimile will monitor  
Enter the desired number of After completing this Configura-  
pseudo rings (1 to 15) before tion Setting, you may continue  
switching to facsimile reception to select other settings referring  
call in Auto Receive mode.  
for the automatic fax CNG sig-  
nal. If detected, the unit will  
switch to fax reception when set  
for FAX/TAD mode.  
in TEL/FAX mode.  
to their associated pages for in-  
structions, or press  
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
When the desired ring count is  
displayed on the LCD, press:  
When the desired ring count is  
displayed on the LCD, press:  
When the desired Fax monitor  
time is displayed on the LCD,  
press:  
COMPLETED  
COMPLETED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
COMPLETED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
Go to Step 6.  
Go to Step 6.  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
Go to Step 6.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copy Reduction Setting  
This function allows automatic  
Display the COPY  
REDUCTION Menu  
Select the Copy  
Reduction  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
reduction of the recording im-  
age when making copies. The  
default setting is OFF.  
1
2
3
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other settings referring  
to their associated pages for in-  
structions, or press  
Press:  
To set Copy Reduction to  
AUTO, press:  
NOTES:  
•
If this function is en-  
abled, documents longer  
than the effective print-  
able area (see page 86)  
will be reduced by 95,  
90, 86, 83, 80 or 73%  
depending on the docu-  
ment length.  
+
+
+
+
To set Copy Reduction to OFF,  
press:  
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
•
If this function is dis-  
abled, documents more  
than 10 mm longer than  
the effective printable  
area will be split onto  
two pages. No image will  
be discarded.  
COMPLETED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
The excess portion of a  
document that is less  
than 10 mm longer than  
the effective printable  
area will be discarded.  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
COPY REDUCTION  
2.OFF  
Contact  
your  
authorized  
1.AUTO  
TOSHIBA service representa-  
tive for additional information.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BASIC FUNCTIONS - AUTOMATIC TELEPHONE DIALING  
Abbreviated Dialer Registration  
Once registered, 38 One Touch  
Display the TEL  
LIST ENTRY Menu  
Display the ABB.  
NUMBERS Menu  
Enter an ABB. Dial  
Number  
When a Preset ABB.  
Dial Number is Active  
and 100 (DP80F)/150 (DP85F)  
Abbreviated Dial Numbers will al-  
low you to send documents or  
make telephone calls to 138  
(DP80F)/183 (DP85F) frequently  
called numbers without manually  
dialing the entire number.  
1
2
3
4
If the selected Abbreviated Dial  
Number has been previously  
registered, the following infor-  
mation will be displayed on the  
LCD display.  
Press:  
To select “ABB. NUMBERS,”  
press:  
Enter an Abbreviated Dial Num-  
ber from 1 to 999.  
+
•
Abbreviated Dial Numbers  
This machine can store up to  
100 (DP80F)/150 (DP85F)  
16-digit facsimile numbers  
and associated 20-character  
location ID names. This infor-  
mation is stored into Abbrevi-  
ated Dial Numbers labeled  
from 001 to 999.  
ALREADY ASSIGNED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
TEL LIST ENTRY  
1.ABB. NUMBERS  
ABB. NUMBER ENTRY  
(1-999)  
[ ]  
Make sure the 3-digit number  
(001 to 999) appears correctly,  
then press:  
2.ONE TOUCH KEYS  
3.GROUP NUMBERS  
ABB. NUMBER ENTRY  
3.RETAIN  
•
•
One Touch Numbers  
See page 71.  
1.DELETE  
2.MODIFY  
Alternate Numbers  
If one of the primary facsimile  
numbers is busy, and a 2nd  
facsimile is located at that  
same remote location, the  
2nd facsimile’s telephone  
number can be programmed  
as an Alternate Number.  
NOTE:  
Any leading zero (0) can be  
omitted from the Abbreviated  
Dial Number.  
If the ABB. Dial Number you en-  
tered has not been previously  
registered, the screen below will  
be displayed.  
IMPORTANT:  
The total number of available  
locations will vary depending  
upon the amount of informa-  
tion stored in each location.  
Up to 128 digits can be pro-  
grammed into a One Touch  
or Abbreviated number.  
FAX NUMBER (128MAX)  
[
]
Skip to Step 6.  
If the ABB. Dial Number you en-  
tered has been previously regis-  
tered, continue to the next step.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Abbreviated Dialer Registration - continued  
Change the ABB. Information  
Enter the Telephone  
Number  
5
6
Enter the telephone number you  
want to store (up to 128 digits).  
You can delete, modify, or retain  
Abbreviated Dial Numbers regis-  
tered in this facsimile.  
5a  
5b  
5c  
Retain the Current  
Delete the ABB. Dial  
Information  
Modify the ABB. Dial  
Information  
ABB. Dial Information  
•
DELETE  
Deletes  
To delete the contents stored in  
the Abbreviated Dial Number,  
press:  
To change the number or Loca-  
tion ID (remote facsimile name)  
currently assigned to an exist-  
ing Abbreviated Dial Number,  
press:  
If you do not wish to change the  
Abbreviated Dial Number infor-  
mation, press:  
the  
information  
stored in the selected Abbre-  
viated Dial Number. It will  
also remove the number  
from all associated Group Di-  
aling Directories.  
(to DELETE)  
(to RETAIN)  
•
MODIFY  
NOTE:  
Allows you to change the re-  
mote facsimile number and/  
or associated Location ID  
name. This selection is rec-  
ommended if the location is  
used in Group Dialing Direc-  
tories.  
(to MODIFY)  
Return to Step 3 to select a dif-  
ferent Abbreviated Dial Number  
If your facsimile is connected  
to a PBX system, you may  
need to enter an access digit  
(9) and a pause so the sys-  
tem will connect you to an  
outside line. In such cases,  
SPEED DIAL NBR 001  
ARE YOU SURE ?  
The facsimile number currently  
assigned is displayed on the  
bottom row.  
or press  
to return to the  
Then press:  
Standby Mode.  
FAX NUMBER (128MAX)  
[XXXXX  
•
RETAIN  
press  
to enter a 3-sec-  
]
Retains the selected Abbre-  
viated Dial Number informa-  
tion without modification.  
ond pause. This pause may  
be repeated if necessary and  
may be entered anywhere  
between digits. A pause en-  
try is indicated as a hyphen  
“–” on the LCD display.  
Return to Step 3.  
Skip to Step 6.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Abbreviated Dialer Registration - continued  
Enter the Telephone  
Number - continued  
Enter an Alternate  
Number (Optional)  
Enter the Location  
ID Name  
Select Communication Options  
(Advanced Setup)  
6
7
8
9
The telephone number is dis-  
played on the bottom row of the  
LCD display as you enter it.  
Confirm that the number is cor-  
rect.  
Alternate Numbers are optional. Enter the Location ID name of This setting will allow you to  
If the remote location does not the remote party to be assigned specify one or more of the fol-  
have two or more facsimile units to the current Abbreviated Dial lowing Communication Options  
9a  
Select the  
Communication  
Option  
in the same area, you can leave Number.  
this entry blank. (See page 65  
for the Abbreviated Dial Number  
you are registering.  
To skip the Communication Op-  
tions, press:  
See page 36 for more informa-  
for more information.)  
tion on Character Entry.  
Delayed Communication  
Default=off  
FAX NUMBER (MAX128)  
Enter the Alternate Facsimile  
Number.  
When the name is displayed  
correctly on the LCD display,  
press:  
[9583359  
]
Select to program a trans-  
mission start time.  
Go to next step.  
Transmission Report  
Default=off  
To select Communication Op-  
tions, press:  
Enables or disables the  
printing of a TX Report.  
Then press:  
Line Monitor  
ALT NUMBER (128 MAX)  
FAX OPTIONS  
2.NO  
Default=off  
[
]
Enables or disables the line  
monitor speaker during dial-  
ing.  
When “1.YES” is selected, the  
FAX OPTIONS screen appears.  
Follow the next steps for each  
item selection.  
1.YES  
Then press:  
Fax Speed  
Default=off  
Selects  
speed for poor communica-  
tion links.  
a
lower modem  
FAX OPTIONS  
1.DONE  
NAME  
[
(20 MAX)  
]
2.DELAYED COMM.  
3.TX REPORT  
4.LINE MONITOR  
5.FAX SPEED  
Sub Address  
Default=none  
Specifies a Sub Address for  
the Abbreviated Dial Number  
being registered. The remote  
unit must support Sub-Ad-  
dress capabilities.  
6.SUBADDRESS  
These items are outside  
the LCD frame. To view  
them, use the  
scroll key.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Abbreviated Dialer Registration - continued  
Select Communication Options (Advanced Setup) - continued  
9
9c  
9d  
9e  
Line Monitor Speaker  
Delayed Communications  
Transmission Report  
9b  
Done with Option  
Setup  
If you have completed the de-  
sired Communication Options  
setting for this Abbreviated Dial  
Number, select DONE by press-  
ing:  
To designate a specific time at  
which operations using this Ab-  
breviated Dial Number will be  
dialed, press:  
Enter the desired transmission To request a Transmission Re-  
start time in either the 12-hour port automatically after sending  
or 24-hour format depending on documents using this Abbrevi-  
the machine setup. (example: ated Dial Number, select:  
11:30PM in the 12-hour format).  
To  
facsimile’s  
Speaker when dialing this Ab-  
breviated Dial Number, press:  
enable/disable  
Line  
the  
Monitor  
For the 12 hour format, select  
TX REPORT  
2.OFF  
LINE MONITOR  
2.OFF  
PRESS ONE TOUCH  
OR ENTER  
DELAYED COMM.  
[HH:MMAM]  
DELAYED COMM.  
[11:30PM]  
↑↓  
1.ON  
1.ON  
(12 hour format)  
Skip to Step 10.  
To enable a TX Report, press:  
To enable the monitor speaker,  
press:  
AM/PM using the  
or  
DELAYED COMM.  
[HH:MM]  
.
(24 hour format)  
To disable a TX Report, press:  
Then press:  
To disable the monitor speaker,  
press:  
The display returns to the first  
screen in Step 9. Select the next  
Option.  
The display returns to the first  
screen in Step 9. Select the  
next Option.  
The display returns to the first  
screen in Step 9. Select the next  
Option.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Abbreviated Dialer Registration - continued  
Select Communication Options - continued  
9
9f  
9g  
Sub-Address Communication  
Fax Speed  
To transmit documents using  
this Abbreviated Dial Number at  
a lower speed to compensate  
for poor line conditions, press:  
Sub-Address Communications  
allow a variety of specialized  
facsimile communications.  
9g-1  
9g-2  
FAX SPEED  
1.FASTEST POSSIBLE  
Select the Sub-  
Address Options  
Complete the  
Sub-Address  
Options Setup  
2.14400BPS  
3.9600BPS  
4.4800BPS  
SUB  
Sub-Address Transmission  
Allows documents to be routed  
through remote LAN-Facsimile  
devices to specific users’ work-  
stations.  
If the remote party assigned to To complete Sub Address entry  
the Abbreviated Dial Number re- or skip this option, press:  
quires or provides a Sub Ad-  
dress to route or retrieve mes-  
sages, press:  
These items are outside  
the LCD frame. To view  
To select the FASTEST POS-  
SIBLE, press:  
them, use the  
scroll key.  
Allows documents to be trans-  
mitted to specific Mailboxes in  
remote facsimiles.  
The display returns to the first  
screen in Step 9.  
The display returns to the first  
screen in Step 9. Select the next  
Option.  
To select 14400BPS, press:  
To select 9600BPS, press:  
To select 4800BPS, press:  
SUBADDRESS  
1.DONE  
SEP  
Selective Polling  
Allows documents to be re-  
trieved from specific Mailboxes  
in remote facsimiles.  
2.SUBADDRESS SUB  
3.SUBADDRESS SEP  
4.SUBADDRESS PWD  
PWD  
Password  
Allows secure communications  
to SUB and from SEP compat-  
ible devices.  
These items are outside  
the LCD frame. To view  
them, use the  
scroll key.  
IMPORTANT:  
If you designate an incorrect  
sub-address, the communica-  
tion will result in an error. If you  
designate an unnecessary sub-  
address, the communication will  
result in error.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Abbreviated Dialer Registration - continued  
Select Communication Options - continued  
Assign the Abbreviated Dial Number to a One  
Touch Key  
9
10  
9g  
10a  
Sub-Address Communication - continued  
Assign the  
One Touch Key  
10b  
Use a Preassigned  
One Touch Key  
To assign this Abbreviated Dial  
Number to a One Touch Key,  
press the desired One Touch  
Key (Example: One Touch Key  
01).  
If the desired One Touch Key  
has been previously linked to  
another Abbreviated Dial Num-  
ber or preset with a separate  
One Touch number, one of the  
following screens will be dis-  
played.  
9g-3  
9g-4  
9g-5  
Select a SUB  
Sub-Address  
Communication  
Select a SEP  
Sub-Address  
Communication  
Select a PWD  
Sub-Address  
Communication  
To enter a SUB type Sub Ad- To enter a SEP type Sub Ad-  
dress, press:  
To enter a PWD type Sub Ad-  
dress, press:  
dress, press:  
ALREADY ASSIGNED  
COMPLETED  
After 2 seconds:  
SUB  
[
(20MAX)  
]
SEP  
[
(20MAX)  
]
PWD  
[
(20MAX)  
]
After 2 seconds:  
ONE TOUCH NBR  
1.DELETE  
Returns to Step 2.  
2.RETAIN  
Enter the required number (max. Enter the required number (max.  
Enter the required number (max.  
20 digits), then press:  
To DELETE the existing link or  
One Touch assignment and re-  
turn to Step 10a, press:  
Press  
to exit the Menu  
20 digits), then press:  
Returns to Step 9g-1.  
20 digits), then press:  
Returns to Step 9g-1.  
Operation mode and return to  
the Standby Mode.  
Returns to Step 9g-1.  
To RETAIN the existing link or  
One Touch assignment and re-  
turn to Step 10a, press:  
PRESS ONE TOUCH  
OR ENTER  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
One Touch Dialer Registration  
This facsimile provides a total of  
38 One Touch Dial keys.  
Display the TEL  
LIST ENTRY Menu  
Display the ONE  
TOUCH KEYS Menu  
Select a One Touch  
Location  
When a Preset One  
Touch is Active  
1
2
3
4
•
Alternate Numbers  
If one of the primary fac-  
simile numbers is busy, and  
a 2nd facsimile is located at  
that same remote location,  
the 2nd facsimile’s tele-  
phone number can be pro-  
grammed as an Alternate  
Number.  
Press:  
To select “ONE TOUCH KEYS”,  
press:  
Press the desired One Touch If the pressed One Touch key  
key.  
has already been registered  
with a telephone number, the  
following information appears on  
the LCD display.  
Example: One Touch key 03  
+
If the One Touch key has not  
been previously used and the  
following menu is displayed,  
skip to Step 6.  
TEL LIST ENTRY  
1.ABB. NUMBERS  
PRESS ONE TOUCH  
ALREADY ASSIGNED  
2.ONE TOUCH KEYS  
3.GROUP NUMBERS  
After 2 seconds:  
ONE TOUCH NBR  
3.RETAIN  
FAX NUMBER (128MAX)  
[
]
1.DELETE  
2.MODIFY  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
One Touch Dialer Registration - continued  
Change One Touch Information  
Enter the Telephone  
Number  
5
6
Enter the telephone number you  
want to store (up to 128 digits).  
You can delete, modify or retain  
the One Touch key once regis-  
tered into the facsimile.  
5a  
5b  
5c  
Delete the One Touch  
Assignment  
Modify the One Touch  
Assignment  
Retain the One Touch  
Assignment  
•
DELETE  
Deletes  
To delete the One Touch key To change the number or Loca-  
To retain the previous One  
Touch key assignment, press:  
the  
information  
assignment, press:  
tion ID (remote facsimile name)  
currently assigned to an existing  
One Touch key press:  
stored in the selected One  
Touch key. It will also re-  
move the number from all  
associated Group Dialing Di-  
rectories.  
(to DELETE)  
(to RETAIN)  
•
MODIFY  
Return to Step 3 to select a dif-  
ferent One Touch key or press  
(to MODIFY)  
NOTE:  
Allows you to change the re-  
mote facsimile number and/  
or associated Location ID  
name. This selection is rec-  
ommended if the location is  
used in Group Dialing Direc-  
tories.  
ONE TOUCH NBR  
ARE YOU SURE ?  
03  
If your facsimile is connected  
to a PBX system, you may  
need to enter an access digit  
(9) and a pause so the sys-  
tem will connect you to an  
outside line. In such cases,  
The facsimile number currently  
assigned is displayed on the  
bottom row.  
to return to the Standby  
Mode.  
Then press:  
FAX NUMBER (128MAX)  
[XXXXX  
]
•
RETAIN  
press  
to enter a 3-sec-  
Return to Step 3.  
Retains the selected One  
Touch key information with-  
out modification.  
ond pause. This pause may  
be repeated if necessary and  
may be entered anywhere  
between digits. A pause en-  
try is indicated as a hyphen  
“–” on the LCD display.  
Return to Step 6.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
One Touch Dialer Registration - continued  
Enter the Telephone  
Number - continued  
Enter an Alternate  
Number (Optional)  
Enter the Location  
ID Name  
Select Communication Options  
(Advanced Setup)  
6
7
8
9
The telephone number is dis-  
played on the bottom row of the  
LCD display as you enter it.  
Confirm that the number is cor-  
rect.  
Alternate Numbers are optional. Enter the Location ID name of This setting will allow you to  
If the remote location does not the remote party to be assigned specify one or more of the fol-  
have two or more facsimile units to the current One Touch Dial lowing Communication Options  
9a  
Select the  
Communication  
Option  
in the same area, you can leave Number.  
this entry blank. (See page 71  
for the One Touch Number you  
are registering.  
To skip the Communication Op-  
tions, press:  
See page 36 for more informa-  
for more information.)  
tion on Character Entry.  
Delayed Communication  
Default=off  
FAX NUMBER (MAX128)  
Enter the Alternate Facsimile  
Number.  
When the name is displayed  
correctly on the LCD display,  
press:  
[9583359  
]
Select to program a trans-  
mission start time.  
Return to Step 3.  
Transmission Report  
Default=off  
To select Communication Op-  
tions, press:  
Enables or disables the  
printing of a TX Report.  
Then press:  
Line Monitor  
ALT NUMBER (128 MAX)  
FAX OPTIONS  
2.NO  
Default=off  
[
]
Enables or disables the line  
monitor speaker during dial-  
ing.  
When “1.YES” is selected, the  
FAX OPTIONS screen appears.  
Follow the next steps for each  
item selection.  
1.YES  
Then press:  
Fax Speed  
Default=off  
Selects  
speed for poor communica-  
tion links.  
a
lower modem  
FAX OPTIONS  
1.DONE  
NAME  
[
(20 MAX)  
]
2.DELAYED COMM.  
3.TX REPORT  
4.LINE MONITOR  
5.FAX SPEED  
Sub Address  
Default=none  
Specifies a Sub Address for  
the Abbreviated Dial Number  
being registered. The remote  
unit must support Sub-Ad-  
dress capabilities.  
6.SUBADDRESS  
These items are outside  
the LCD frame. To view  
them, use the  
scroll key.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
One Touch Dialer Registration - continued  
Select Communication Options (Advanced Setup) - continued  
9
9c  
9d  
9e  
Line Monitor Speaker  
Delayed Communications  
Transmission Report  
9b  
Done with Option  
Setup  
If you have completed the de-  
sired Communication Options  
setting for this One Touch Dial  
Number, select DONE by press-  
ing:  
To designate a specific time at  
which operations using this  
One Touch Dial Number will be  
dialed, press:  
Enter the desired transmission To request a Transmission Re- To enable/disable the facsimi-  
start time in either the 12-hour port automatically after sending le’s Line Monitor Speaker when  
or 24-hour format depending on documents using this One dialing this One Touch Dial  
the machine setup. (example: Touch Dial Number, select:  
11:30PM in the 12-hour format).  
Number, press:  
For the 12 hour format, select  
DELAYED COMM.  
[HH:MMAM]  
DELAYED COMM.  
[11:30PM]  
TX REPORT  
2.OFF  
LINE MONITOR  
2.OFF  
PRESS ONE TOUCH  
OR ENTER  
↑↓  
1.ON  
1.ON  
(12-hour format)  
Skip to Step 10.  
To enable a TX Report, press:  
To enable the monitor speaker,  
press:  
DELAYED COMM.  
[HH:MM]  
AM/PM using the  
.
or  
(24-hour format)  
To disable a TX Report, press:  
To disable the monitor speaker,  
press:  
Then press:  
The display returns to the first  
screen in Step 9. Select the next  
Option.  
The display returns to the first  
screen in Step 9. Select the  
next Option.  
The display returns to the first  
screen in Step 9. Select the next  
Option.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
One Touch Dialer Registration - continued  
Select Communication Options - continued  
9
9f  
9g  
Sub-Address Communication  
Fax Speed  
To transmit documents using  
this One Touch Dial Number at  
a lower speed to compensate  
for poor line conditions, press:  
Sub-Address Communications  
allow a variety of specialized  
facsimile communications.  
9g-1  
9g-2  
FAX SPEED  
1.FASTEST POSSIBLE  
Select the Sub  
Address Options  
Complete the  
Sub-Address  
Options Setup  
2.14400BPS  
3.9600BPS  
4.4800BPS  
SUB  
Sub-Address Transmission  
Allows documents to be routed  
through remote LAN-Facsimile  
devices to specific users’ work-  
stations.  
If the remote party assigned to To complete Sub Address entry  
the One Touch Dial Number re- or skip this option, press:  
quires or provides a Sub Ad-  
dress to route or retrieve mes-  
sages, press:  
These items are outside  
the LCD frame. To view  
To select the FASTEST POS-  
SIBLE, press:  
them, use the  
scroll key.  
Allows documents to be trans-  
mitted to specific Mailboxes in  
remote facsimiles.  
The display returns to the first  
screen in Step 9.  
To select 14400BPS, press:  
To select 9600BPS, press:  
To select 4800BPS, press:  
The display returns to the first  
screen in Step 9. Select the next  
Option.  
SUBADDRESS  
1.DONE  
SEP  
Selective Polling  
Allows documents to be re-  
trieved from specific Mailboxes  
in remote facsimiles.  
2.SUBADDRESS SUB  
3.SUBADDRESS SEP  
4.SUBADDRESS PWD  
PWD  
Password  
Allows secure communications  
to SUB and from SEP compat-  
ible devices.  
These items are outside  
the LCD frame. To view  
them, use the  
scroll key.  
IMPORTANT:  
If you designate an incorrect  
sub-address, the communica-  
tion will result in an error. If you  
designate an unnecessary sub-  
address, the communication will  
result in error.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
One Touch Dialer Registration - continued  
Select Communication Options - continued  
9
9g  
Sub-Address Communication - continued  
9g-3  
9g-4  
9g-5  
Select a SUB  
Sub-Address  
Communication  
Select a SEP  
Sub-Address  
Communication  
Select a PWD  
Sub-Address  
Communication  
To enter a SUB type Sub Ad- To enter a SEP type Sub Ad-  
To enter a PWD type Sub Ad-  
dress, press:  
dress, press:  
dress, press:  
SUB  
[
(20MAX)  
]
SEP  
[
(20MAX)  
]
PWD  
[
(20MAX)  
]
Enter the required number (max. Enter the required number (max.  
Enter the required number (max.  
20 digits), then press:  
20 digits), then press:  
Returns to Step 9g-1.  
20 digits), then press:  
Returns to Step 9g-1.  
Returns to Step 9g-1.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Group Number Registration  
You can send a document to  
Display the TEL  
LIST ENTRY Menu  
Display the GROUP  
NUMBERS Menu  
Enter a Group Number  
multiple remote parties in a  
single operation. This is referred  
to as Group Dialing or Multi-ad-  
dress Transmission.  
1
2
3
Press:  
To select “GROUP NUMBERS,” Enter a Group Number (1 to If the number entered is already  
press:  
1999).  
registered as a Group Number,  
you will receive an LCD prompt  
like the one below.  
It is useful to preset addresses,  
to which Multi-address Trans-  
missions are often performed, in  
a group. To make a Multi-ad-  
dress Transmission easier, you  
can assign such a group to a  
One Touch key.  
+
ALREADY ASSIGNED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
The preset groups can also be  
used as groups for Multi-polling  
Receptions.  
TEL LIST ENTRY  
1.ABB. NUMBERS  
GROUP NUMBER  
(1-1999)  
[ ]  
Example: 1  
GROUP NUMBER  
3.RETAIN  
2.ONE TOUCH KEYS  
3.GROUP NUMBERS  
You can register up to 25  
(DP80F)/50(DF85F) Broadcast  
Groups using any combination  
of Group Numbers from 1 to  
1999 (no duplications allowed).  
You may also assign each  
group an optional name of up  
to 20 characters.  
GROUP NUMBER  
(1-1999)  
1.DELETE  
2.MODIFY  
[ 1]  
Then press:  
To select “1.DELETE,” go to  
Step 4a.  
Each group can contain any  
To select “2.MODIFY,” go to  
Step 4b.  
combination  
of  
the  
100  
NAME  
[
(20 MAX)  
]
(DP80F)/150 (DP85F) Abbrevi-  
ated and/or 38 One Touch dial  
locations and can be assigned  
to a One Touch key.  
To select “3.RETAIN,” go to  
Step 4c.  
The display changes to the fol-  
lowing for character entry (go to  
Step 5).  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Group Number Registration - continued  
4a Cancel the Existing 4b Modify the Existing 4c Retain the Existing  
5
6
Enter the Group  
Name  
Enter a Remote  
Station  
Group  
Group  
Group  
To delete the existing Group,  
press:  
To change the existing Group,  
press:  
To retain the existing Group,  
press:  
Enter the Group Name (with up Enter the addresses of the re-  
to 20 characters) associated mote stations to be preset in  
with the Group Number.  
the group.  
If a remote station is assigned  
to a One Touch key, press the  
One Touch key.  
See page 36 for more informa-  
tion on Character Entry.  
(to DELETE)  
(to MODIFY)  
(to RETAIN)  
(When no name is entered in  
this step, no name will be given  
to the Group Number.)  
If a remote station is assigned  
to an Abbreviated Dial Number,  
enter the number then press  
Return to Step 3 to select a dif-  
ferent Group Dial Number or  
GROUP NUMBER  
ARE YOU SURE ?  
0001  
NAME  
[COLORADO GRP]  
When the name is displayed  
correctly on the LCD display,  
press:  
press  
to return to the  
.
Then press:  
The current Group Name is dis-  
played.  
Standby Mode.  
Example:  
Go to Step 5.  
Abbreviated Dial Number  
118 (preset as DENVER  
OFFICE):  
Return to Step 3.  
ENTER ABB. NUMBER  
OR ONE TOUCH  
+
+
+
GROUP NUMBER  
0001  
SPEED DIAL NBR 118  
After 2 seconds:  
PRESS OT OR ABB.  
OR ENTER  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Group Number Registration - continued  
7a Cancel the Group 7b Retain the Group  
8
9
Enter a Remote  
Station - continued  
Complete Group  
Station Entries  
Assign a One Touch  
Key  
6
Number Setting  
Number Setting  
Repeat this step until all of the  
required remote station ad-  
dresses are entered. Then go to  
Step 8.  
To delete the existing remote To retain this remote station in  
When all the stations necessary To assign this group to a One  
for this group are entered in Touch key, press the desired  
station from this group, press:  
this group, press:  
Step 6, press:  
One Touch key.  
Example: One Touch key 20.  
(to DELETE)  
(to RETAIN)  
NOTE:  
•
When the entered Abbrevi-  
ated Dial Number or One  
Touch key has not been pre-  
registered with a facsimile  
number, the display shows  
the message “NUMBER  
NOT LISTED.” Then returns  
to Step 5.  
+
SPEED DIAL NBR 118  
ARE YOU SURE ?  
PRESS OT OR ABB.  
OR ENTER  
PRESS ONE TOUCH  
OR ENTER  
Press:  
Return to Step 6.  
COMPLETED  
•
When the entered Abbrevi-  
ated Dial Number or One  
Touch key is already as-  
signed in this group, the dis-  
play shows the screens be-  
low.  
After 2 seconds:  
DELETED  
GROUP NUMBER  
(1-1999)  
[
]
Returns to Step 3.  
Return to Step 6.  
ALREADY ASSIGNED  
After 2 seconds:  
ALREADY ASSIGNED  
2.RETAIN  
1.DELETE  
Go to Step 7a or Step 7b.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Group Number Registration - continued  
Assign a One Touch Key - continued  
9
To skip assigning this group to a  
One Touch key, press:  
If the selected One Touch key  
is already linked to or registered  
with data, the following is dis-  
played.  
COMPLETED  
ALREADY ASSIGNED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Return to Step 3.  
Press  
to complete the  
ONE TOUCH NBR  
2.RETAIN  
Group Setting operation and re-  
turn to the Standby Mode.  
1.DELETE  
To select “1.DELETE” (to delete  
the existing link or preset data of  
this One Touch key), press:  
Returns to Step 9.  
To RETAIN, press:  
Returns to Step 9.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
- TRANSMIT CONFIGURATION  
Document Specifications  
Caution:  
If the documents are any of the following, they should be copied to plain paper  
before transmitting.  
The following table shows the specifications for original documents that can be used  
with this facsimile.  
Single Sheet  
Multiple Sheets  
•
•
•
•
Torn, wrinkled, or damp pages  
Folded pages or pages with holes  
Transparent pages or pages with a smooth, shiny finish  
Cloth or metal sheets  
216 mm (W) x 1000 mm (L)  
[8.5 in. (W) x 39.37 in. (L)]  
Max.  
Min.  
Document  
Size  
When using originals with the following specifications, use a carrier sheet to avoid  
document jams or misfeeds. When using carrier sheets, only one sheet can be  
sent at a time.  
148 mm (W) x 100 mm (L)  
[5.83 in. (W) x 3.94 in. (L)]  
Effective Scanning  
Width  
214 mm  
[8.43 in.]  
•
•
Smaller than minimum size.  
With thickness less than 0.05 mm.  
To use a carrier sheet, lift the clear cover, place a single document sheet face-up  
on the paper sheet. Purchase carrier sheets from your TOSHIBA facsimile dealer  
or use a transparency with a paper backing attached at the lead edge.  
Max. Capacity of  
Document Tray  
Up to 15 sheets (Legal Size)  
Up to 30 sheets (Letter Size)  
Thickness of  
Document  
0.06 to 0.15 mm  
[0.003 to 0.006 in.]  
0.065 to 0.1 mm  
[0.003 to 0.004 in.]  
Type of Paper  
Uncoated on both sides  
NOTES:  
•
Operator assistance may be required for pages longer than 356 mm (14.02  
inches).  
•
•
For multiple sheets, the documents must be the same size and paper type.  
A small border region of each document is not imaged when each document is  
scanned. The effective scanning area is as shown in the figure below.  
216 mm (8.5 inches)  
2.5 mm (0.1 inches)  
Effective  
Scanning  
Area  
Letter/Legal Size  
2.5 mm (0.1 inches)  
214 mm (8.43 inches)  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Document Loading  
Remove Attached  
Items  
Place Document Pages on the Document  
Support  
Adjust the Settings  
1
2
3
After the facsimile pulls the  
document into the scan position  
slightly and stops, you may  
change the resolution and con-  
trast settings. (It may also be  
changed before or during the  
document loading.)  
About 45°  
Document Face Side  
46  
47  
48  
To cancel a document already  
set and pulled in, press:  
Up to 30 sheets (Letter-size) Adjust the Document Guides to  
can be loaded and sent at a fit the width of the document.  
time.  
Load the document face down  
Stagger the leading edges of on the Document Support. The  
the sheets slightly and insert first page of your document  
If your document is extremely  
dark or light, or if it contains  
photographs, you may wish to  
adjust the contrast and resolu-  
tion settings. See the following  
pages.  
them into the document feeder.  
should be at the bottom of the  
Document Support.  
80  
Gently insert the leading edge of  
the paper into the facsimile as  
shown. The facsimile waits 2  
seconds, then pulls the docu-  
ment into the scanning area and  
stops.  
Remove any staples, paper  
clips, or other items from your  
document before feeding it into  
the facsimile.  
When scanning Legal-size doc-  
uments, extend the Document  
Support Extension and Docu-  
ment Exit Tray Extension.  
When a Carrier Sheet is used,  
documents must be sent one  
page at a time (manually fed).  
When the document sheet is  
longer the Document Support,  
assist it with your hand to insure  
proper feeding.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scan Resolution Setting  
The scan resolution can be set  
to one of the following five  
modes based on the type of im-  
age you are scanning.  
Press  
until the required resolution mode is  
indicated by the appropriate LED.  
The scan resolution is normally  
set to the default setting. When  
you change the resolution, the  
facsimile will return to the de-  
fault setting after each transac-  
tion. To change the default reso-  
lution setting, see page 85.  
: illuminated  
: extinguished  
The mode changes as follows:  
(
)
FINE  
U-FINE  
HALFTONE  
Standard Mode (when all the lamps are extinguished)  
FINE  
STANDARD  
U-FINE  
HALFTONE  
Fine Mode  
For sending normal text and  
graphics.  
FINE  
FINE  
U-FINE  
HALFTONE  
Ultra-Fine Mode  
For sending normal text and  
graphics with extra clarity.  
Each corresponding  
lamp is illuminated.  
U-FINE (Ultra-Fine)  
FINE  
For sending fine text and  
graphics with extra clarity.  
Fine Halftone Mode  
U-FINE  
HALFTONE  
FINE HALFTONE  
FINE  
For detailed photos or docu-  
ments with colors or shading.  
Ultra-Fine Halftone Mode  
U-FINE  
HALFTONE  
U-FINE HALFTONE  
(Ultra-Fine Halftone)  
For very detailed photos or  
documents with colors or  
shading.  
*
When Ultra-Fine is selected, the DF80F/DP85F will scan all  
documents at 406 dots/inch horizontal x 391 lines/inch vertical.  
Depending on the capabilities of the remote facsimile receiving  
this document, the document may be transmitted by the DF80F/  
DP85F at Ultra-Fine resolution (406 dots/inch horizontal x 391  
lines/inch vertical) or it may be transmitted at Super Fine (203  
dots/inch horizontal x 391 lines/inch vertical).  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contrast Setting  
The Contrast Setting adjusts the  
print darkness of the document  
to be read.  
Press  
until the required contrast level is indi-  
cated by the appropriate LED.  
The contrast can be set to one  
of the following settings. The  
facsimile will return to the de-  
fault setting after each transac-  
tion.  
: illuminated  
: extinguished  
The level changes as follows:  
(
)
To change the default contrast  
setting, see page 85.  
DARKER  
LIGHTER  
Normal level (when all the lamps are extinguished)  
NORMAL  
For standard originals.  
DARKER  
DARKER  
LIGHTER  
To darken light originals (i.e.,  
for documents with light or  
faint print).  
Lighter level  
Each corresponding  
lamp is illuminated.  
LIGHTER  
To lighten the dark originals  
(i.e., for documents with dark  
print or shaded areas).  
DARKER  
LIGHTER  
Darker level  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting for Document Mode (Resolution and Contrast)  
This setting will select the de-  
Display the  
Select the  
Resolution  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
Select the Contrast  
fault setting whenever a docu-  
ment is set in the facsimile for  
transmission. Manual settings (if  
selected for a particular docu-  
ment) will take precedence over  
default settings.  
1
2
4
3
DOCUMENT MODE  
Menu  
Select the desired resolution  
setting by pressing one of the  
following keys.  
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other settings referring  
to their associated pages for in-  
structions, or press  
Press:  
Select the default contrast level  
by pressing one of the following  
keys.  
Select STANDARD mode for  
sending normal text and graph-  
ics by pressing:  
Select NORMAL for normal  
documents by pressing:  
+
+
+
+
Select DARKER to darken light  
originals (i.e., for documents  
with light or faint print) by press-  
ing:  
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
Select FINE mode for sending  
normal text and graphics with  
extra clarity by pressing:  
Select U-FINE (Ultra-Fine) for  
sending fine text and graphics  
with extra clarity by pressing:  
Select LIGHTER to lighten dark  
originals (i.e., for documents  
with dark print) by pressing:  
DOCUMENT MODE  
1.STANDARD  
CONTRAST  
1.NORMAL  
COMPLETED  
2.FINE  
2.DARKER  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
3.U-FINE  
3.LIGHTER  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
- COPYING  
Paper Size for Copying  
You can utilize the DP80F/DP85F as a convenient copier to make sorted copies of  
original documents. The following are key points when making copies.  
At the time of copying, the SORT function may be selected. This function will sort  
multiple page copies into sets of correct-order pages.  
Recording Paper Size  
Output Examples of Printed Copies  
The paper sizes usable with your fax unit are limited to Letter or Legal size. The  
received document is recorded (printed) within the Effective Recording Area of the  
paper.  
With SORT Function ON  
With SORT Function OFF  
Paper Size  
Letter: mm  
A
B
C
D
Page 1  
Page 1  
Page 1  
Page 2  
Page 2  
Page 2  
Page 3  
Page 3  
Page 3  
Effective  
Recording  
Area  
Page 3  
Page 2  
Page 1  
Page 3  
Page 2  
Page 1  
Page 3  
Page 2  
Page 1  
216 212 274 279  
C D  
inches 8.5 8.34 10.8 11.0  
Legal: mm  
216 212 351 356  
inches 8.5 8.34 13.8 14.0  
B
A
NOTE:  
•
The following copy resolutions are available:  
FINE  
U-FINE  
FINE+HALFTONE  
U-FINE+HALFTONE  
NOTES:  
NOTES:  
•
The pages are automatically  
sorted.  
•
Sorting is the responsibility of the  
operator.  
•
Requires enough memory for the  
entire multi-page document. If  
there is not enough memory  
(memory overflow), the copying  
procedure will be canceled.  
•
Memory requirements are limited  
to one page at a time.  
•
Collation is slower than non-col-  
lation because the entire docu-  
ment must be scanned into  
memory first, then printing can  
occur.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying Procedure  
Load the Document  
Press the COPY Key  
Display the SORT  
COPY Menu  
Select the SORT  
COPY Option  
Select the Paper  
Tray  
1
2
3
4
5
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Display the COPY menu by  
pressing:  
Select the desired Sort Copy Select the desired paper tray.  
option.  
Use the  
key to move to  
To select Paper Tray, press:  
To enable a Sort Copy, press:  
the Sort Copy screen.  
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
Enter the number of copies re-  
quired. If no entry is made, the  
number of copies will automati-  
cally be set to “1.”  
To select Bypass Tray, press:  
To disable a Sort Copy, press:  
To select Optional Paper Tray  
(if installed), press:  
SORT COPY  
2.OFF  
PAPER CASSETTE  
1.TRAY 1  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
COPIES  
(1-99)  
→
[ 1]  
1.ON  
2.BYPASS  
3.TRAY 2  
*
COPIES  
(1-99)  
→
[ 1]  
*
If installed Optional Paper  
Tray.  
If you select “2.BYPASS,” the  
following screen is displayed.  
PAPER SIZE  
2.LETTER  
3.LEGAL  
1.A4  
Go to Step 6.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying Procedure - continued  
Select the Paper  
Size of the Bypass  
Tray  
Select the Thick  
Paper Option  
Enter the Number of  
Copies  
6
7
8
Select the paper size of the By-  
pass Tray.  
Select the thick paper mode.  
Select the number of copies  
(max. 99).  
To enable the thick paper mode,  
press:  
To select the A4 size, press:  
To select the Letter size, press:  
To select the Legal size, press:  
To disable the thick paper  
mode, press:  
When all settings are complete,  
press:  
THICK PAPER  
2.OFF  
NOTE:  
1.ON  
If the Sort option is selected,  
the  
document  
will  
be  
scanned into memory first.  
COPYING  
COPIES  
01/10  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
- DIALING METHODS  
Your TOSHIBA facsimile pro-  
vides various dialing methods.  
One Touch Key Dialing  
If you have programmed a re-  
mote party’s facsimile number  
to a One Touch key, you can  
dial that number by pressing the  
corresponding One Touch key.  
One Touch Dialing  
One Touch Key Dialing  
1
Dials remote locations with  
the touch of a single key.  
See page 71 for program-  
ming.  
Select the desired One Touch  
key from 01 to 38 (see page 71  
for programming).  
ONE TOUCH=  
L.A. OFFICE  
01  
The resolution and contrast set-  
tings may be changed if neces-  
sary (see pages 83 and 84).  
Abbreviated Dialing  
Dials remote locations using  
an abbreviated dial number  
from 001 to 999. See page  
65 for programming.  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
To select the One Touch key  
from 20 to 38, press  
be-  
fore pressing the desired One  
Touch key.  
SCANNING DOC  
FILE NBR =  
P001  
089  
Alphabet Dialing  
Allows a location selection  
using an alphabetic index  
search of the Location IDs  
programmed into One Touch  
and Abbreviated Dialing Di-  
rectories.  
Example: One Touch key 01  
During scan to memory  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 99%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
One Touch key 20  
+
During transmission  
Keypad Dialing  
Accepts unregistered tele-  
phone number entry directly  
from the operation panel.  
NOTES:  
If a One Touch key is not  
•
programmed, the mes-  
sage “NUMBER NOT  
LISTED” is displayed for  
The One Touch key number and  
the name of the party appear on  
the LCD display for about 2 sec-  
onds.  
See other dialing related func-  
tions on the following pages:  
2
seconds, an alarm  
buzzer sounds and the  
display returns to the pre-  
vious status screen.  
Multi-Key Dialing  
Chain Dialing  
Redialing  
page 113  
page 148  
page 102  
Your facsimile will automatically  
start scanning the document  
into memory (if enabled). While  
scanning, the facsimile dials,  
connects, and starts transmis-  
sion.  
ONE TOUCH=  
01  
Handset &  
Monitor Dialing  
pages 98  
and 99  
NUMBER NOT LISTED  
Setting Redial  
page 61  
•
When an incorrect One  
Touch key has been se-  
Interval & Counter  
lected, press  
im-  
mediately to cancel the  
transmission.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Abbreviated Dialing  
Once an Abbreviated Dial Num-  
ber is programmed with a valid  
remote facsimile location, that  
location can be accessed by re-  
calling the corresponding Abbre-  
viated Dial Number.  
Press the SPEED  
DIAL Key  
Enter the  
Abbreviated Number  
Press the START Key Tray  
1
2
3
Press:  
When the correct number is dis-  
played, press:  
Enter the Abbreviated Dial Num-  
ber (1 to 999) assigned to the  
desired party.  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 99%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
The document must be loaded  
and the resolution and contrast  
set before a transmission using  
Abbreviated Dialing (see pages  
83 and 84).  
During transmission  
+
NOTE:  
When the number entered  
(within the range of  
The Abbreviated Dial Number  
and the name of the party will  
appear on the LCD display for  
about 2 seconds.  
1
ABB. NUMBER  
(1-999)  
through 999) is not prepro-  
grammed with a specific par-  
ty’s facsimile or telephone  
number, the message “NUM-  
BER NOT LISTED” is dis-  
played for 2 seconds and  
then the facsimile returns to  
the screen in Step 1.  
[ ]  
Your facsimile will automatically  
start scanning the document  
into memory (if enabled). While  
scanning, the facsimile dials,  
connects, and starts transmis-  
sion.  
NOTE:  
When an incorrect number is  
entered, use  
to delete  
preceding digits, or press  
ABB. NBR=  
10  
ABB. NBR=  
10  
LONDON OFFICE  
NUMBER NOT LISTED  
once to start over  
from the beginning.  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Example of Abbreviated Dial  
Number, 10:  
SCANNING DOC P001  
FILE NBR =  
091  
During scan to memory  
ABB. NUMBER  
(1-999)  
[ 10]  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alphabet Dialing  
“Alphabet Dialing” is used to dial  
the desired party by searching  
for the name of the registered  
Location ID name in the Abbre-  
viated Dial, One Touch Dial and  
Group Dial List.  
Display the Name of  
the Desired Remote  
Party  
Press the SPEED  
DIAL Key  
Press the START  
Key  
1
2
3
Press the key on the dial key- Once the desired name is dis-  
pad which corresponds to the played, press:  
name.  
Press:  
The document must be loaded  
and the resolution and contrast  
set before a transmission using  
Alphabet Dialing (see pages 83  
and 84).  
+
Example:  
To find the location named  
“LONDON OFFICE”:  
The One Touch key or Abbrevi-  
ated Dial Number and the name  
of the party appear on the LCD  
display for about 2 seconds.  
Press  
3 times to display  
the screen for names beginning  
with “L.”  
Your facsimile will automatically  
start scanning the document  
into memory (if enabled). While  
scanning, the facsimile dials,  
connects, and starts transmis-  
sion.  
SEARCH LETTER = 1  
SEARCH LETTER = L  
L.A. OFFICE  
Use the following keys to dis-  
play the desired location (“LON-  
DON OFFICE” in this example).  
ABB. NBR=  
002  
LONDON OFFICE  
or  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
SCANNING DOC P001  
SEARCH LETTER = L  
LONDON OFFICE  
FILE NBR =  
091  
During scan to memory  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 99%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
During transmission  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keypad Dialing  
If you have not preset the tele-  
phone number of the destination  
facsimile to an Abbreviated Dial  
Number or One Touch key, you  
can dial your destination by en-  
tering the number from the Dial  
Keypad.  
Enter the Facsimile  
Number  
Press the START  
Key  
1
2
Enter the facsimile number of  
the desired party.  
When the correct number is dis-  
played, press:  
The document must be loaded  
and the resolution and contrast  
set before a transmission using  
Keypad Dialing. (See pages 83  
and 84.)  
Your facsimile will automatically  
start scanning the document  
into memory (if enabled). While  
scanning, the facsimile will di-  
als, connects, and starts trans-  
mission.  
NOTE:  
When an incorrect number is  
SCANNING DOC P001  
FILE NBR =  
093  
entered, use  
to delete  
preceding digits, or press  
During scan to memory  
once to start over  
from the beginning.  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 99%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
During transmission  
Example with 012345678 en-  
tered:  
TEL NUMBER=(MAX128)  
012345678  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
- TRANSMITTING  
Memory Transmission  
A Memory Transmission first scans and stores the document into memory prior to a  
transmission to a remote facsimile(s).  
File Number and Residual Memory  
•
FILE NUMBERS  
The facsimile assigns a File Number to each transmission or polling-reception  
job for internal control of reserved communications.  
Memory Transmission is automatically initiated with any of the following dialing meth-  
ods.  
This File Number is very useful, should it become necessary to cancel  
a
• One Touch Dialing  
• Abbreviated Dialing  
• Alphabet Dialing  
• Keypad Dialing  
(See page 89)  
(See page 90)  
(See page 91)  
(See page 92)  
memory operation. It is also useful when tracking communication activities  
using the transmission and reception journals (see page 195).  
File Number Display Example:  
You may reserve a transmission even when other Memory Communications are under  
way.  
SCANNING DOC  
FILE NBR =  
P001  
123  
File No.  
Once scanning a document is started, the facsimile will dial, connect and start trans-  
mission to the remote location. In the event the Memory becomes full, Memory Re-  
lease will hold originals in the ADF until the pages already stored into memory are  
successfully transmitted. As each page is successfully transmitted, the Memory for  
subsequent pages will be released and the next page is scanned.  
•
RESIDUAL MEMORY  
The amount of memory remaining for memory transmission usage is called  
Residual Memory and is displayed as a percentage value.  
Residual Memory Display Example:  
If a connection is not established during the scanning procedure, Memory Release will  
be disabled (see NOTES).  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 70%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
Residual Memory  
To bypass Memory Transmission, see page 96 on Direct Document Transmission.  
NOTES:  
1. If there is not enough Residual Memory or the  
Job queue it at full capacity, a Memory Full sta-  
tus may occur. If this occurs during scanning a  
document for transmission, the facsimile dis-  
plays MEMORY OVERFLOW.  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
MEMORY OVERFLOW  
2. If this message is displayed, press  
to cancel the Memory Transmis-  
sion. The Memory Overflow message will be reset and the document will be  
ejected.  
3. Wait until memory becomes available (i.e., after some reserved jobs are com-  
pleted), and retry the job later or use a Direct Document Transmission (see  
page 95).  
4. A maximum of 100 transmissions can be reserved for Memory Transmissions  
(including Polling Reception reservations and mailboxes). Any transmission at-  
tempted thereafter will result in a direct transmission from the ADF.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory Transmission - continued  
Memory Transmission Procedure  
Load the Document  
Dial the Facsimile  
Number  
Start Scanning  
Return to the  
Standby Mode  
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
The facsimile starts scanning  
and storing the document into  
memory.  
Dial the facsimile number of the  
remote party using any of the  
four dialing methods.  
When the document scanning is  
complete, the facsimile returns  
to the Standby Mode.  
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
A File Number is assigned.  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
Residual Memory will decrease  
as the document is scanned.  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 99%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
•
Press  
to cancel the  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
transmission operation.  
•
Press  
if a dialing er-  
ror occurs.  
Example of screen displayed  
while a number is entered by  
Keypad Dialing:  
TEL NUMBER =(MAX128)  
0559761234  
SCANNING DOC  
FILE NBR =  
P001  
108  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Direct Transmission  
Direct Transmission is used if  
there is not enough residual  
memory or when a large num-  
ber of document pages are to  
be sent, etc.  
Direct Transmission as Default Setting  
Load the Document  
Dial the Facsimile  
Number  
Start Dialing  
Line Connection to  
the Remote Party  
1
2
3
4
This mode is also useful if the  
operator wishes to visually con-  
firm the actual transmission of  
the document to the remote par-  
ty.  
This procedure will discuss Di-  
rect Transmission when se-  
lected as the default setting or  
when Residual Memory has  
been depleted.  
Once the facsimile number is  
entered, the dialing starts.  
Once connected to the destina-  
tion facsimile, the screen below  
is displayed.  
Dial the facsimile number of the  
remote party using any of the  
four dialing methods.  
The documents will remain in  
the ADF and be transmitted one  
by one.  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
DIALING  
COMMUNICATING  
+81 559 761234  
0559761234  
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
If the destination facsimile is  
busy, the screen below is dis-  
played.  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
WAITING TO REDIAL  
AUTO RECEIVE  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
•
Press  
if a dialing er-  
If the redial procedure is com-  
pleted without a success, the  
screen below is displayed and  
printed the Transmission Re-  
port.  
ror occurs.  
Example of screen displayed  
when Residual Memory has  
been depleted:  
Example of screen displayed  
while a number is entered using  
Keypad Dialing:  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 0%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
PRINTING LIST  
TEL NUMBER =(MAX128)  
0559761234  
After printing  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
LINE BUSY  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Direct Transmission - continued  
Direct Transmission as Default Setting - continued  
Document  
Transmission  
Complete the  
Transmission  
5
6
The transmission starts as the  
document is scanned, the  
screen below is displayed.  
When the communication is  
complete, BUSY lamp turns off  
and the facsimile returns to the  
Standby Mode.  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
TRANSMIT  
+81 559 761234  
P001  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Direct Transmission - continued  
Temporary Direct Transmission  
Even if the Memory Transmis-  
sion Mode is selected as the de-  
fault, you may desire to transmit  
Load the Document  
Change the  
Transmission Mode  
Select YES  
Dial the Facsimile  
Number  
1
2
3
4
a
specific document directly  
from the Automatic Document  
Feeder.  
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Select the desired function key Select “1. YES” by pressing:  
on the operation panel.  
Dial the facsimile number of the  
remote party using any of the  
four dialing methods.  
This is useful when the docu-  
ment consists of many pages or  
when the residual memory is too  
small to store the document  
data.  
Press:  
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
DIRECT TX  
1.YES  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
2.NO  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Direct Transmission - continued  
On-hook Transmission (Monitor Speaker Dialing)  
You can send your documents  
Load the Document  
Press the MONITOR  
Key  
Dial the Facsimile  
Number  
Press the START  
Key  
with On-hook Dialing using the  
monitor speaker to confirm the  
answering tone from the remote  
party’s facsimile.  
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down in Press:  
the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Dial the facsimile number of the  
remote party using any of the  
four dialing methods.  
When you hear the answering  
tone, press  
. If an  
The facsimile is connected to  
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
the telephone line and the dial  
tone is heard through the speak-  
er.  
operator answers the phone,  
pick up the handset (if  
equipped) and inform the re-  
mote party that you wish to  
send a document.  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
TEL NUMBER=(MAX128)  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
[
]
Upon hearing the facsimile  
tone, press:  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
NOTE:  
If an incorrect number is di-  
aled, press and fol-  
When the transmission is com-  
pleted, the facsimile returns to  
the Standby Mode.  
low the instruction displayed  
on the LCD display to start  
the operation over.  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
Example of screen displayed  
while a number is entered using  
Keypad Dialing:  
TEL NUMBER=(MAX128)  
[0559761234  
]
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Direct Transmission - continued  
Off-hook Transmission (Optional Handset Dialing)  
This procedure may be useful  
when you want to talk with a  
remote party using the optional  
handset of the facsimile before  
Load the Document  
Pick Up the Handset  
(Optional)  
Dial the Facsimile Number  
1
2
3
sending a document.  
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Pick up the handset of the fac-  
simile.  
Dial the facsimile number of the  
remote party using any of the  
four dialing methods.  
Example of screen displayed  
while a number is entered using  
Keypad Dialing:  
The unit is connected to the  
telephone line and you hear the  
dial tone through the speaker of  
the handset.  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
TEL NUMBER=(MAX128)  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
TEL NUMBER=(MAX128)  
[
]
[0559761234  
]
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
NOTES:  
•
To use the Keypad Dial-  
ing procedure on page  
78, do not press the final  
in this step.  
•
If an incorrect number is  
dialed, press  
and follow the instruction  
displayed on the LCD  
display to start over the  
operation.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Direct Transmission - continued  
Off-hook Transmission (Optional Handset Dialing) - continued  
Press the START  
Key  
4
When you hear the answering  
tone, press  
. If the re-  
mote party answers the phone,  
you can inform the remote party  
that you wish to send a docu-  
ment.  
Upon hearing the facsimile tone,  
press:  
Then replace the handset.  
When the transmission is com-  
pleted, the facsimile returns to  
the Standby Mode.  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Direct Transmission - continued  
External Off-hook Transmission (Transmission Using an External Telephone)  
This procedure may be useful  
Load the Document  
Pick Up the Handset of  
the External Telephone  
Dial on the External  
Telephone  
Press The START  
Key  
when you want to talk with a re-  
mote party before sending a  
document. A telephone set must  
be connected to the “TEL” con-  
nector. (This telephone set is  
called the “External Telephone”  
in this manual.)  
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Dial the facsimile number of the  
remote party using the keypad  
of the External Telephone.  
When you hear the answering  
tone, press on the  
Pick up the handset of the Ex-  
ternal Telephone connected to  
the “TEL” connector of the fac-  
simile.  
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
The entered number is immedi-  
ately dialed. The number is not  
displayed on the facsimile’s  
LCD display.  
facsimile. If the remote party  
answers the phone, you can in-  
form the remote party that you  
wish to send a document.  
The External Telephone is con-  
nected to the telephone line via  
the facsimile, and the dial tone  
is heard through the speaker of  
the External Telephone.  
NOTE:  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
Upon hearing the facsimile  
tone, press:  
When the External Tele-  
phone is in the off-hook sta-  
tus (i.e. while “EXTERNAL  
OFF HOOK” is displayed),  
the Dial Keypad on the fac-  
simile does not accept any  
key entry.  
The display on the facsimile  
shows  
“EXTERNAL  
OFF  
HOOK” on the LCD display.  
EXTERNAL OFF HOOK  
Then replace the handset of the  
External Telephone.  
When the transmission is com-  
pleted, the facsimile returns to  
the Standby Mode.  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Redialing  
Automatic Redialing  
Manual Redialing Direct Transmission  
When the line of the remote  
party is busy, the facsimile will  
automatically redial the remote  
party up to the set number of  
times with intervals of the set  
length (see page 61).  
This function enables you to re-  
Press the MONITOR  
Key  
Press the REDIAL  
Key  
Redial the Remote  
Party  
dial the number last dialed us-  
ing this facsimile to transmit a  
document.  
1
2
3
Press:  
To enter the On-hook Dialing  
(Monitor Speaker Dialing) mode,  
press:  
When you hear the answering  
tone, press . If the re-  
WARNING:  
If the line is not connected after  
the set number of redialing at-  
tempts, the facsimile will record  
a LINE BUSY.  
If you press  
, the  
The last number dialed is dis-  
played. The display varies de-  
pending on the dialing method  
used.  
mote party answers the phone,  
pick up the handset (optional).  
Inform the remote party that you  
wish to send a document.  
facsimile will clear the fac-  
simile number registered  
and lose the manual redial  
capability.  
Confirm the facsimile number of  
the remote party and repeat the  
transmission procedure.  
TEL NUMBER=(MAX128)  
[
]
The displayed number is imme-  
diately redialed.  
Upon hearing the facsimile  
tone, press:  
NOTE:  
This feature will not function  
with numbers dialed using  
the optional handset or an  
external telephone.  
TEL NUMBER=(MAX128)  
[0559761234  
]
If no number is registered as a  
redial number, the screen below  
is displayed for 2 seconds, then  
returns to Step 1.  
When the transmission is com-  
pleted, the facsimile returns to  
the Standby Mode.  
TEL NUMBER=(MAX128)  
NUMBER NOT LISTED  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Redialing - continued  
Manual Redialing Jobs in Memory  
This function enables you to  
Press the REDIAL  
Key  
Select the Job to be Redialed  
Start Redialing  
transmit a document after se-  
lecting it from the jobs reserved  
in memory waiting to be  
redialed.  
1
2
3
Press:  
Wait 5 seconds or press any  
key on the Operation Panel ex-  
When the desired job is dis-  
played, press:  
FILE NBR =  
L.A. OFFICE  
121  
123  
124  
NOTE:  
cept  
to display the  
If you are using Department  
Codes, the initiating Depart-  
ment Code must match for  
this operation to work.  
REDIAL  
[ENTER]:START  
screen on the right.  
Screen Index:  
The facsimile starts to dial the  
number for a transmission.  
FILE NBR =  
SEATTLE FACTORY  
•
If there are no jobs to be  
redialed, the screen below is  
1st line ... File Number  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
2nd line ... Destination of  
redialing  
displayed for  
2
seconds,  
then the facsimile returns to  
the Standby Mode.  
Locate the screen of the desired  
job using the following scroll  
keys.  
FILE NBR =  
L.A. OFFICE  
REDIAL  
NUMBER NOT LISTED  
(for the previous screen)  
(for the next screen)  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
- RECEIVING  
Automatic Reception Mode  
FAX/TAD Switching Mode  
“AUTO RECEIVE” is the ability of the facsimile to receive docu-  
ments sent to your facsimile automatically.  
This mode is used together with a TAD (telephone answering device/machine).  
This mode allows you to receive voice messages and facsimile receptions even when no one is present  
in the office.  
The facsimile starts to receive a document after a pre-selected num-  
ber of rings. You can change the ringer count (see page 62).  
Switching between the voice message recording and facsimile receiving is performed automatically.  
NOTE:  
A ring delay can be selected should you wish to speak to the  
calling party before receiving a facsimile.  
If you do not pick up the handset within the selected delay  
period, the facsimile will automatically answer the call and at-  
tempt to receive a document.  
FAX Monitor Time:  
When the voice message recording is completed earlier than the FAX Monitor Time, the  
line will be switched to the facsimile side. However, if the voice message recording  
exceeds the time value, the line will not be switched to the facsimile side.  
(1) Caller in Automatic Facsimile Transmission Mode  
When the facsimile signal is detected during or after the TAD Answering Message switching is  
automatically made for Facsimile Reception mode.  
(2) Caller Attempting a Phone Call  
After the TAD Answering Message and the TAD Beep Tone, the TAD will record the message from  
the caller.  
(3) Caller in Manual Facsimile Transmission Mode (may first leave a voice message if within the FAX  
Monitor Time)  
When the caller starts a facsimile transmission during the Answering Message or after the TAD Beep  
Tone, switching is made for Facsimile Reception mode.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manual Receiving Mode  
TEL/FAX Auto Switching Mode  
“MANUAL RECEIVE” allows you to use the facsimile as a telephone  
This mode is used when the line is used for both facsimile and telephone.  
(talking function) first and then start a document reception by press-  
ing:  
The facsimile automatically determines whether an incoming call is for facsimile or telephone. When the  
call is for telephone, the ringer will ring according to the value set for the call time. When the call is for  
facsimile, the machine will automatically start receiving the document.  
If the other party is sending a document, the facsimile automatically receives the document. If the other  
party is making a phone call, the facsimile goes on to generate a pseudo-rings.  
1. When the facsimile rings, pick up the optional handset and talk  
with the remote party.  
2. If you hear the facsimile tone through the handset instead of an  
operator’s voice, you may manually initiate a facsimile reception  
by pressing:  
3. Replace the optional handset to the cradle. The facsimile will  
start receiving the document.  
NOTE:  
A telephone fee on the caller’s side will be charged to  
the caller during the Pseudo Ringer period. Inform the  
calling party of this fact. Also note that the Pseudo-  
ringer is not generated on a telephone connected in  
parallel.  
(1) Caller in Automatic Facsimile Transmission Mode  
Detects the facsimile signal and the facsimile will engage Auto Reception mode.  
(2) Caller in Manual Facsimile Transmission Mode  
If you pick up the optional handset of the facsimile during the Pseudo Ringer period, you can talk  
with the caller, then press  
to start receiving a document. When the Pseudo Ringer period  
ends (because no one answers), the facsimile is automatically switched to Facsimile Reception  
mode. In this mode, the remote party can manually send a document as well.  
(3) Caller Attempting a Phone Call  
You can talk with the caller if you pick up the optional handset of the facsimile during the Pseudo  
Ringer period. When using a connected external telephone, you must press  
caller.  
to talk with the  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting the Reception Mode  
Recording Paper Size  
The Automatic Reception Mode  
(AUTO RECEIVE) is normally  
selected. You can change the  
reception mode by pressing the  
If Auto Receive mode is se-  
lected, press:  
This facsimile can use Letter and Legal size paper. The received document is recorded (printed) within  
the Effective Recording Area of the paper.  
D
Paper Size  
Letter: mm 216 212 274 279  
inches 8.5  
11.0  
A
B
C
key.  
Effective  
Recording  
Area  
D
C
Refer to Reception Mode selec-  
tion on page 62.  
If FAX/TAD mode is selected,  
press:  
8.34 10.8  
Legal: mm 216 212 351 356  
inches 8.5 8.34 13.8 14.0  
Press:  
B
A
If TEL/FAX mode is selected,  
press:  
NOTES:  
RECEPTION MODE  
1.FAX  
•
If the received document is equal to or shorter than the recording area of the paper, the received  
document is printed at its actual size.  
2.FAX/TAD  
3.TEL/FAX  
4.MANUAL  
•
If the received document is larger than the recording area of the paper, it will be vertically and  
horizontally reduced to fit on the recording paper installed. The reception will be divided onto two  
sheets if the document needs to be reduced to smaller than 73% of its original size.  
If Manual Receive mode is se-  
lected, press:  
Document  
Recording  
Paper  
•
If you desire to receive large originals without reduction or excessive paper usage, set the  
”DISCARD” function to “ON.” If the lower part of the original exceeds the recording paper by 13  
mm or less, the image will be automatically discarded. This predetermined dimension is a service  
function setting. Contact your Toshiba dealer for setup.  
•
If the “RX REDUCTION” function is “OFF”, the larger original will be recorded on two or more  
sheets. The top of the second page will repeat about 5 mm of the lower part of the first page.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
- TELEPHONE HANDSET OPERATION (Optional)  
If the optional handset is in-  
stalled, you can make a tele-  
On-hook Dialing  
phone call using your DP80F/  
Press the MONITOR  
Key  
Dial the Remote  
Party  
Pick Up the Handset  
Replace the Handset  
DP85F just like an ordinary tele-  
phone.  
1
2
3
4
Without loading any document  
on the Document Support,  
press:  
Enter the telephone number of Pick up the handset to talk.  
the remote party using any of  
When you finish talking, return  
the handset to the handset  
cradle.  
NOTE:  
the following dialing methods.  
If you do not pick up the  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
handset in 1 minute after di-  
aling, the line will be auto- Standby Mode.  
matically disconnected.  
The display returns to the  
You hear the dial tone through  
the speaker.  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tone Output  
Redialing  
This function is for utilizing vari- When the number you dialed is  
ous information services via the busy, or you want to redial the  
Press the MONITOR  
or Pick Up the  
Handset  
Press the REDIAL  
Key  
1
2
telephone.  
last number you dialed, you can  
recall the last number dialed us-  
Even when the dial type of your  
Pick up the optional handset or Press:  
press:  
facsimile is set to DP (Dial ing  
Pulse) type, the facsimile can  
.
generate a TONE signal to ac-  
cess information services such  
as facsimile-on-demand sys-  
tems, voice menus, etc.  
To use redialing with voice call-  
ing, you must press  
or  
The last-dialed number is dis-  
played and redialing starts im-  
mediately.  
You hear the dial tone through  
the speaker or the handset.  
pick up the optional handset of  
the facsimile first.  
Once on line, generating the  
TONE signal can be accom-  
plished by pressing:  
NOTE:  
TEL NUMBER=(MAX128)  
TEL NUMBER=(MAX128)  
To prevent others from  
redialing your call, press  
[0559761234  
]
[
]
while in the on-hook  
or off-hook status. This will  
clear the phone number reg-  
ister.  
NOTE:  
From the moment when  
is pressed until the  
end of that transaction or un-  
til you press  
again,  
touch-tone (MF) signals will  
be transmitted when you  
press any key on the Dial  
Keypad.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
- COMMUNICATION STATUS  
Current Job Status  
Communication  
Journal  
The job being processed can be  
monitored via the LCD. You can  
cancel the job if necessary.  
A Communication Journal (or  
Transmission Journal and Re-  
ception Journal separately) can  
be issued to confirm the last 40  
transmissions and 40 recep-  
tions.  
Continue or Cancel  
the Job  
Press the JOB  
STATUS Key  
Select YES or NO  
2
1
3
NOTES:  
In the Standby Mode, press:  
With the phone line status in Press one of the following keys.  
Step 1 displayed, you can either  
continue or cancel the job. To  
continue, wait for the facsimile  
to return to the Standby Mode or  
•
When no communication  
job is being processed,  
only the number of re-  
served jobs is displayed  
as below.  
To cancel the job, press:  
With the Standby Mode screen  
displayed, select the function  
key on the operation panel.  
The following screen shows an  
example of the Job Status dis-  
play when the phone line is in  
use (BUSY lamp blinking):  
Press:  
press  
.
To continue without cancelling  
the job, press:  
PENDING JOBS=  
x
JOB CANCEL TO CANCEL  
To cancel and erase the dis-  
played job, press:  
TRANSMIT  
+81 425 85 3002  
P005  
A communication journal is is-  
sued automatically when 40  
transmissions or receptions are  
completed if programmed.  
•
When no jobs are re-  
served or being pro-  
cessed, the screen below  
is displayed for 2 sec-  
onds.  
While the screen above is dis-  
played, pressing  
will  
display the Pending Job.  
NO ENTRY  
PENDING JOBS=  
JOB CANCEL TO CANCEL  
x
CANCEL?  
1.YES  
2.NO  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
- CANCELLING A COMMUNICATION JOB  
Cancelling a Direct Transmission  
Cancelling a Job Reservation  
Reserved jobs can be cancelled  
A Document is  
Being Transmitted  
Press the STOP Key  
Select the Desired  
Option  
Display the JOB  
CANCEL Menu  
while they remain in memory.  
The following 5 types of jobs  
can be cancelled using this pro-  
cedure.  
1
2
3
1
A screen such as the one below  
is displayed while a document  
is being transmitted in the Di-  
rect Transmission Mode.  
Press:  
Select the desired option.  
In the Standby Mode, press:  
To cancel the transmission,  
press:  
1. TRANSMIT  
2. RECEIVE  
3. POLLING  
4. POLLING RESERVE  
5. JOB NUMBER  
TRANSMIT  
+81 425 86 7449  
P001  
CANCEL ?  
1.+81425867449  
JOB CANCEL  
1.TRANSMIT  
To continue the transmission,  
press:  
2.NO  
2.RECEIVE  
3.POLLING  
4.POLLING RESERVE  
5.JOB NUMBER  
NOTE:  
The types of jobs displayed  
within the Job Cancel screen  
will vary depending upon the  
actual job types currently in  
use.  
If a job type is not currently  
active, it will not appear on  
the LCD screen.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cancelling a Job Reservation - continued  
Select the Job Type  
Enter JOB NUMBER  
Cancel Other Jobs  
Press the ENTER to  
Cancel the Job  
2
3
4
5
Select the desired job type.  
Enter the job number you want  
to cancel.  
When the desired job screen is  
displayed, press:  
[SET]:CANCEL  
[↑ ↓]:SEARCH  
Display the status of the de-  
sired job by using  
A screen like the one below is  
displayed.  
and/or  
.
CANCEL ?  
1.YES  
Go to Step 5.  
The operation and screen to fol-  
low varies for each item number  
selected.  
2.NO  
JOB NUMBER ?  
[ ]  
Previous Job in the List  
To confirm deletion, press:  
If you selected 2.RECEIVE, go  
to Step 3.  
Go to Step 5.  
If you selected 5.JOB NUM-  
BER, go to Step 3.  
To not cancel the selection,  
press:  
FILE NBR =  
123  
If you selected:  
1. TRANSMIT  
3. POLLING  
4. POLLING RESERVE  
Go to Step 4.  
JOB CANCELLED  
Next Job in the List  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADVANCED FUNCTIONS - MULTI-ADDRESS TRANSMISSION (BROADCASTING)  
Group Broadcast Transmission  
The Group Broadcast Transmis-  
Load the Document  
Select the Group  
Location  
Enter the Group  
Number  
Press the START  
Key  
sion feature allows you to send  
a document to multiple remote  
parties in a single operation.  
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down Press the One Touch Key pro- Enter the Multi-address Trans- When the correct Group Num-  
Note that a Group Broadcast  
Transmission requires all pages  
to be scanned to memory prior  
to dialing, and thus adequate re-  
sidual memory is required.  
in the Document Support (see grammed for the desired group.  
page 82).  
mission Group Number (1 to ber is displayed, press:  
1999).  
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
EXAMPLE:  
To enter the Group Number  
0001, press:  
NOTE:  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
ONE TOUCH =  
COLORADO GRP  
05  
GROUP NBR =  
COLORADO GRP  
0001  
If the optional handset is in-  
stalled, the handset dialing is  
not available.  
After 2 seconds:  
(Leading zeros, if any, may  
be omitted.)  
SCANNING DOC. P001  
FILE NBR = xxx  
SCANNING DOC. P001  
FILE NBR = xxx  
NOTE:  
When an incorrect number is  
When document scan-  
ning is completed:  
When document scan-  
ning is completed:  
Standby Mode screen  
entered, use  
to delete  
Standby Mode screen  
the preceding digits, or press  
Or, display the Group Dial Di-  
rectory by pressing:  
once to start over  
from the beginning.  
+
GROUP NBR =(1-1999)  
[ 1]  
GROUP NBR =(1-1999)  
[ ]  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multi-Key Quick Broadcast Transmission  
The Multi-Key Quick Broadcast  
Transmission allows documents  
to be sent to a combination of  
the following numbers without  
pre-programming a group.  
Load the Document  
Press the MULTI  
Key  
Enter the Facsimile Number  
1
2
3
Enter the facsimile number of  
the remote party using any of  
the four dialing methods.  
Load the document face down Press:  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Repeat this step until the fac-  
simile numbers of all the desired  
remote parties are entered.  
•
•
•
•
Abbreviated Dial Numbers  
One Touch Dial Keys  
Alphabet Dialed Numbers  
Keypad Dialed Numbers  
When the facsimile numbers of  
all the desired remote parties  
are entered, go to Step 5.  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
To cancel or retain a facsimile  
number already programmed to  
a Manual Group Dial, go to Step  
4.  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
MULTI GROUP  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
A screen like the one below is  
displayed.  
ABB NBR=  
154  
INFORMATION BUREAU  
After 2 seconds:  
ENTER MORE OR  
PRESS [START]  
NOTE:  
If you select the same entry  
twice, you are prompted to  
delete or retain that second  
entry.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multi-Key Quick Broadcast Transmission - continued  
Press the START  
Key  
Select the CANCEL or RETAIN Facsimile Number  
5
4
You can cancel or retain the  
Manual Group Dial Number reg-  
istered in this facsimile.  
Press:  
4a  
4b  
Cancel the Existing  
Number  
Retain the Existing  
Number  
Select the number you want to  
To cancel the existing number,  
press:  
To retain the existing number,  
press:  
delete or retain using  
, and press:  
or  
SCANNING DOC. P001  
FILE NBR= XXX  
(to CANCEL)  
(to RETAIN)  
When document  
scanning is completed:  
Standby Mode screen  
ALREADY ASSIGNED  
1.CANCEL  
ABB NBR=  
ARE YOU SURE ?  
154  
ENTER MORE OR  
PRESS [START]  
2.RETAIN  
Then press:  
Return to Step 3.  
To select “1.CANCEL,” go to  
Step 4a.  
To select “2.RETAIN,” go to  
Step 4b.  
ABB NBR=  
CANCELLED  
154  
Return to Step 3.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
- RELAY TRANSMISSION  
Relay Transmission, Relay-Relay Transmission Overview  
To perform Relay Transmissions or Relay-Relay Transmissions, you must build a  
network beforehand.  
What is a “Relay Transmission”?  
A relay transmission is used to send documents from your facsimile (originator)  
to a Hub Station, which then sends them to additional end stations. If you have  
several stations in one or more regional areas (e.g. Los Angeles Metro, New  
York City, Dallas-Ft. Worth, Seattle-Tacoma, etc.); you can save time and phone  
charges by setting up a relay system. By sending your document to a Hub  
Station, you can then instruct the Hub Station to retransmit the document to the  
end stations in their local geographical area.  
Consult your authorized TOSHIBA dealer for assistance in using this function.  
Conditions for a Relay/Relay-Relay Transmission Network  
1. The originator station must be an ITU-T relay communication compatible fac-  
simile unit such as TOSHIBA DP120F/DP125F/DP80F/DP85F.  
2. The Hub Station must be an ITU-T relay communication compatible facsimile  
unit with Hub Station functions such as DP120F/DP125F.  
End Station Group  
(stations to finally re-  
ceive the document)  
NOTE:  
The DP80F/DP85F can only function as an originator station.  
Hub  
Station  
Originator  
Station  
3. The Relay Hub Station must have the end station settings pre-programmed as  
a Relay Box.  
End Station  
4. Due to advanced planning and setup requirements for the Relay-Relay trans-  
missions involving two or more Hub Station transfers, contact your authorized  
TOSHIBA dealer for detailed instructions.  
What is a “Relay-Relay Transmission”?  
A Relay Transmission where two levels of Hub Stations are involved is called a  
Relay-Relay Transmission. In a Relay-Relay Transmission, the first Hub Station  
sends the document to another Hub Station(s) which then transmits them to  
additional end stations.  
End Station Group  
(stations to finally re-  
ceive the document)  
Second  
Hub Station  
End Station  
End Station  
Hub  
Station  
Originator  
Station  
Second  
Hub Station  
End Station  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Relay Transmission Originating Procedure  
This section describes the pro-  
Load the Document  
Display the MAILBOX  
Menu  
Select the RELAY  
REQUEST  
Enter the Box  
Number  
cedures to send a document to  
Relay Box in a relay station.  
The relay station must be com-  
pliant with ITU-T F-code com-  
munications. For more informa-  
tion, see page 115.  
1
2
3
4
Press:  
Press:  
Enter the Box Number (max. 20  
digits).  
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
+
+
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
+
NOTE:  
The destination relay box  
must be setup in the remote  
hub unit prior to sending  
documents.  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
ITU MAILBOX  
BOX NUMBER  
[
Then press:  
01.CONFIDENTIAL  
02.BULLETIN BOARD  
03.RELAY REQUEST  
]
SETUP PASSWORD  
2.NO  
04.SETUP & DELETE  
1.YES  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Relay Transmission Originating Procedure - continued  
Select the Password  
Option  
Enter the Password  
Dial the Remote Hub  
Unit  
Complete the  
Procedure  
5
6
7
8
Enter the password to access  
the Relay Box.  
If the relay station is a password  
is programmed, press:  
Enter the facsimile number of  
the remote hub unit using any  
of the following dialing meth-  
ods.  
The facsimile starts scanning  
the document into memory. The  
following screen is displayed for  
about 2 seconds before return-  
ing to the Standby Mode.  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
Go to Step 6.  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
SCANNING DOC. P001  
If the relay station is not a pass-  
word is programmed, press:  
FILE NBR=  
231  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
Then press:  
Go to Step 7.  
SEND(RELAY)  
ENTER FAX NUMBER  
TEL NUMBER=(MAX128)  
[123  
]
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
- POLLING & MAILBOX COMMUNICATIONS  
The DP80F/DP85F features ad-  
vanced Polling and Mailbox  
Polling & Mailbox Overview  
functions designed to provide  
remote document retrieval capa-  
bilities. In addition, the DP80F/  
DP85F is a “Hub” type unit  
where documents can be stored  
and polled by other facsimiles  
(with polling capabilities to re-  
trieve documents from the  
DP80F/DP85F).  
Polling Reservation  
Polling Reception  
Polling Reservation allows documents to be stored in the DP80F/ Polling Reception is the ability to call up another facsimile and  
DP85F so that other facsimile machines can remotely retrieve (Poll) remotely retrieve a document stored within the remote facsimile.  
those documents. The following types of polling reservations are The following types of polling receptions are available.  
available.  
Simple Polling  
Simple  
The DP80F/DP85F can call any other facsimile with polling res-  
ervation capabilities to remotely retrieve a document. See page  
124.  
Documents can be reserved for a one time polling operation  
using the facsimile’s memory so that any facsimile with polling  
reception capabilities can remotely retrieve the document. See  
page 120.  
Secure Polling  
The DP80F/DP85F can call another TOSHIBA facsimile with  
security polling reservation capabilities to remotely retrieve a  
document using a 4-digit security code. See page 124.  
Security  
Documents can be reserved for a one time polling operation that  
requires a 4-digit security code to be entered prior to sending the  
document. Security reservation is only available when communi-  
cating with other TOSHIBA facsimiles. See page 120.  
Multi Address Polling  
Multi Address Polling allows the DP80F/DP85F to sequentially  
poll multiple remote facsimiles using a group of facsimile num-  
bers stored as a group directory or as a MULTI key operation.  
See page 126.  
Multi Mailbox  
Documents can be reserved for multiple polling operations using  
the facsimile’s memory so that any facsimile with polling capabili-  
ties can remotely retrieve the document. See page 122.  
Continuous Polling  
Continuous Polling permits the DP80F/DP85F to continuously  
sequentially dial and retrieve documents from a group of fac-  
simile numbers. See page 130.  
Turnaround Polling  
Turnaround Polling allows the DP80F/DP85F to transmit docu-  
ments to a remote facsimile and then poll documents from the  
remote facsimile on the same phone call. See page 128.  
Delayed Polling  
Delayed Polling permits the DP80F/DP85F to poll a document(s)  
from a remote location(s) at a later time. See page 179.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Polling & Mailbox Overview - Continued  
Open Mailbox (ITU-T Compatible)  
The Open Mailbox is a new international standard for mailbox communications. Open Mailbox (ITU-T F-  
code communications) allows storage and retrieval of documents via mailboxes that comply with this  
standard. The DP80F/DP85F is a hub unit that has document storage capabilities so that ITU-T F-Code  
compliant remote units can retrieve documents from the DP80F/DP85F. Prior to utilizing Open Mailbox,  
mailboxes must be created in the DP80F/DP85F. Following two types of Mailboxes are available.  
Confidential Box  
Confidential box allows a one time document retrieval from the mailbox. Once a document is  
retrieved, it is cleared. If a new document is stored using the same box number where another  
document is already present, it is added to the existing one. It is possible to setup a password  
requirement for accessing the Confidential Box for document retrieval to prevent unauthorized re-  
trieval of documents. This password is used only when retrieving documents and not used during  
document reservation.  
Bulletin Board Box  
Bulletin Board box allows multiple document retrievals from the mailbox. If a new document is stored  
using the same Box number where another document is already present, it replaces the existing one.  
It is possible to setup a password requirement for accessing the Bulletin Board Box for document  
reservation during setup. This password is used only when reserving documents from a remote  
facsimile or the local hub and not used during document retrieval.  
1. To setup an Open Mailbox, see page 132.  
2. To delete an Open Mailbox, see page 134.  
3. To reserve a document to a remote hub, see page 136.  
4. To reserve a document to a local DP80F/DP85F, see page 138.  
5. To retrieve (Poll) a document from a remote hub, see page 140.  
6. To retrieve (Print) a document from a local DP80F/DP85F, see page 142.  
7. To delete a document from an Open Mailbox, see page 144.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Simple & Security Polling Reservation  
This procedure allows the  
DP80F/DP85F to send a docu-  
Load the Document  
Display the  
POLLING Menu  
Select POLLING  
RESERVE  
Select POLL ONCE  
BOX  
1
2
3
4
ment to another remote facsimi-  
le when requested. In addition,  
documents can be protected  
from unauthorized remote fac-  
similes by using security codes.  
Two types of security codes are  
offered.  
Load the document face down Press:  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Select “02.POLLING RESERVE” Select “1.POLLING” by press-  
by pressing:  
ing:  
+
+
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
4-Digit Security Code  
+
When the 4-digit security code  
is selected as the check code,  
the document can only be re-  
ceived by TOSHIBA facsimiles  
with the matching security code.  
Facsimile Number  
POLLING  
01.POLLING  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
POLLING RESERVE  
1.POLL ONCE BOX  
SECURITY FAX NUMBER  
1.NO  
If a facsimile number is selected  
as the check code, the remote  
facsimile’s Transmit Terminal  
Identification (TTI) is checked  
prior to document transmission.  
This type of security code can  
be used with facsimiles made  
by other manufacturers.  
02.POLLING RESERVE  
03.TURNAROUND POLL  
04.PROG. CONT. POLL  
2.MULTI POLL BOX  
2.SECURITY CODE  
3.FAX NUMBER  
4.SECURITY FAX NBR  
This TTI must be properly pro-  
grammed into the remote fac-  
simile for this procedure to func-  
tion.  
NOTES:  
•
Only one Simple Polling  
reservation can be set at  
one time.  
•
Simple Polling reserva-  
tion is not available if a  
document is reserved in  
the Multi Mailbox.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Simple & Security Polling Reservation - continued  
6a Select SECURITY 6b Select FAX  
6c Select SECURITY  
7
Select the Security  
Option  
Complete the  
Procedure  
5
CODE  
NUMBER  
FAX NBR  
Select “4.SECURITY FAX NBR”  
by pressing:  
Use the Dial Keypad to select Select “2.SECURITY CODE” by Select “3.FAX NUMBER” by  
one of the following options or pressing: pressing:  
The facsimile starts scanning  
the document.  
use  
/
to scroll  
SCANNING DOC. P001  
FILE NBR =  
140  
up/down the menu and press  
.
SECURITY CODE  
SECURE FAX  
[
SECURITY CODE  
[
]
]
[
]
When the document scanning is  
complete, the display returns to  
the Standby Mode.  
Enter a 4-digit Security Code  
(0000 to 9999) using the Dial  
Keypad.  
Enter a 4-digit Security Code Enter the number of the polling  
(0000 to 9999) using the Dial (remote) facsimile using the Dial  
Keypad. Each digit of the en- Keypad (max. 20 digits).  
tered code is displayed as an  
1. NO  
Select this option if you do  
not want to use security. Go  
to Step 7.  
NOTE:  
If a Simple Polling operation  
is already reserved, the fol-  
lowing screen is displayed.  
asterisk.  
SECURE FAX  
[123456789  
SECURITY CODE  
[****]  
2. SECURITY CODE  
]
Select this option to use a 4-  
digit Security Code with  
TOSHIBA facsimiles only.  
Go to Step 6a.  
SECURITY CODE  
[****]  
ALREADY ASSIGNED  
1.DELETE  
Then press:  
Then press:  
2.ADD +  
3. FAX NUMBER  
Then press:  
3.RETAIN  
Select this option to use the  
telephone number of the  
polling (remote) facsimile’s  
as the security code. Go to  
Step 6b.  
Go to Step 7.  
SECURE FAX  
[
You may select one of the fol-  
lowing three options.  
]
NOTE:  
Go to Step 7.  
This number must be pro-  
grammed in the terminal ID  
of the remote facsimile. If no  
number or an unmatched  
number is in the terminal ID,  
a polling error will occur.  
Enter the number of the polling-  
receiver’s facsimile (max. 20  
digits).  
1. DELETE  
NOTE:  
4. SECURITY FAX NBR  
Select this option to use both  
a 4-digit security code and a  
facsimile number. Go to Step  
6c.  
Select this option to replace  
the previous reservation.  
You must provide this 4-digit  
number to the remote party  
in advance or they will not be  
able to retrieve this docu-  
ment. If no code or an incor-  
rect code is used, a polling  
error will occur.  
2. ADD +  
SECURE FAX  
[123456789  
Select this option to add this  
document to the existing res-  
ervation.  
]
When the number is displayed  
3. RETAIN  
Select this option to retain  
the existing reservation.  
correctly, press:  
Go to Step 7.  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multi Mailbox Polling Reservation  
Multi Mailbox is a feature used  
Display the  
POLLING RESERVE  
Menu  
Load the Document  
Select MULTI POLL  
BOX  
Select POLLING  
RESERVE  
to store a document in memory  
so that multiple remote parties  
may poll to receive it at any  
time. No Security Codes are  
used with this feature. The doc-  
ument is retained in memory re-  
gardless of how many times it is  
polled.  
1
2
4
3
Press:  
Select “2.MULTI POLL BOX” by  
pressing:  
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Select “02.POLLING RESERVE”  
by pressing:  
+
+
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
NOTES:  
+
•
Only one Multi Mailbox  
polling reservation can be  
set at one time.  
•
When a Simple Polling  
reservation is reserved,  
Multi Mailbox reservation  
is not available.  
POLLING  
01.POLLING  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
POLLING RESERVE  
1.POLL ONCE BOX  
02.POLLING RESERVE  
03.TURNAROUND POLL  
04.PROG. CONT. POLL.  
2.MULTI POLL BOX  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multi Mailbox Polling Reservation - continued  
Complete the  
Procedure  
5
The facsimile starts scanning  
the document.  
SCANNING DOC. P001  
FILE NBR =  
140  
When the document scanning is  
complete, the display returns to  
the Standby Mode.  
NOTE:  
If a Multi Mailbox operation  
is already reserved, the fol-  
lowing screen is displayed.  
ALREADY ASSIGNED  
1.DELETE  
2.ADD +  
3.RETAIN  
You may select one of the fol-  
lowing three options.  
1. DELETE  
Select this option to replace  
the previous reservation.  
2. ADD +  
Select this option to add this  
document to the existing res-  
ervation.  
3. RETAIN  
Select this option to retain  
the existing reservation.  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Simple & Secure Polling  
Use this procedure to retrieve a  
document from a remote fac-  
simile.  
Display the  
POLLING Menu  
Select POLLING  
Dial the Remote  
Facsimile  
Select the Security  
Code Option  
1
2
3
4
If the remote facsimile is a  
Press:  
Select “01.POLLING” by press- Dial the number of the remote Select the security code option.  
TOSHIBA facsimile and a 4-digit  
security code is programmed to  
the document to be polled, you  
must enter the correct 4-digit se-  
curity code in order to retrieve  
the document.  
ing:  
facsimile (in which the document  
you want to retrieve is located)  
using any of the following dialing  
methods.  
If the remote facsimile is a  
TOSHIBA facsimile and a 4-digit  
security code is programmed to  
the document to be polled, se-  
lect “1. YES” by pressing:  
+
+
+
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
Go to Step 5.  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
POLLING  
01.POLLING  
POLLING  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
If the remote facsimile is not a  
TOSHIBA facsimile or a Secu-  
rity Code is not in use, select “2.  
NO” by pressing:  
02.POLLING RESERVE  
03.TURNAROUND POLL  
04.PROG. CONT. POLL.  
Press:  
Go to Step 6.  
SECURITY CODE ?  
1.YES  
2.NO  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Simple & Secure Polling - continued  
Enter the Security  
Code  
Complete the  
Procedure  
5
6
Enter the 4-digit security code The facsimile will dial the remote  
for the document to be re- facsimile to retrieve the docu-  
trieved.  
ment. When the operation is  
complete, the following screen  
is displayed for about 2 seconds  
and your documents will be  
printed.  
SECURITY CODE=  
OPERATION COMPLETED  
[****]  
FILE NBR =  
167  
When the 4-digit security code  
is entered, press:  
Go to Step 6.  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multi-Address Polling  
In a Multi Polling operation, the  
Display the  
POLLING Menu  
Select POLLING  
Press the MULTI  
Key  
Enter the Number of  
Remote Facsimiles  
documents are retrieved from  
multiple remote facsimiles using  
pre-programmed groups, One  
Touch Keys, Abbreviated Dial  
Numbers, Alphabet Dial, or from  
the Dial Keypad.  
1
2
3
4
Press:  
Select “01.POLLING” by press- Press:  
ing:  
Enter the number of the remote  
facsimiles using any combina-  
tion of the following dialing  
methods.  
+
+
+
•
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
POLLING  
01.POLLING  
POLLING  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
MULTI POLLING  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
Group Dialing  
... See page 112  
02.POLLING RESERVE  
03.TURNAROUND POLL  
04.PROG. CONT. POLL.  
After each entry, the selected  
facsimile is displayed for 2 sec-  
onds.  
ABB. NUMBER=  
009  
GREENSVILLE PLANT  
Repeat this procedure until all  
remote facsimiles are entered.  
ENTER MORE OR  
PRESS [START]  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multi-Address Polling - continued  
Select the Security  
Code Option  
Enter the Security  
Code  
Complete the  
Procedure  
5
6
7
When all the remote facsimile  
locations have been entered in  
Step 4, press:  
Enter the 4-digit security code The facsimile will dial the re-  
for the document to be re- mote facsimiles to retrieve the  
trieved.  
documents. When the operation  
is complete, the following  
screen is displayed for about 2  
seconds and your documents  
will be printed.  
SECURITY CODE ?  
1.YES  
OPERATION COMPLETED  
2.NO  
FILE NBR =  
167  
If all of the remote facsimiles  
are TOSHIBA facsimiles and the  
same 4-digit security code is  
programmed for all of the docu-  
ments to be polled, select “1.  
YES” by pressing:  
SECURITY CODE=  
[****]  
When the 4-digit security code  
is entered, press:  
Go to Step 6.  
If all or some the remote fac-  
similes are not a TOSHIBA fac-  
simile or no Security Codes are  
being used, select “2. NO” by  
pressing:  
Go to Step 7.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Turnaround Polling  
Turnaround Polling allows you  
to poll another facsimile after  
transmitting documents to it on  
the same phone call.  
Load the Document  
Display the  
POLLING Menu  
Select TURNAROUND  
POLL  
Select ON  
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down in Press:  
the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Select “03.TURNAROUND  
POLL” by pressing:  
To set Turnaround Poll to ON,  
press:  
NOTE:  
Turnaround polling may not  
operate with certain non-  
TOSHIBA models.  
+
+
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
+
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
POLLING  
01.POLLING  
SECURITY CODE ?  
1.YES  
TURNAROUND POLL  
2.OFF  
02.POLLING RESERVE  
03.TURNAROUND POLL  
04.PROG. CONT. POLL.  
2.NO  
1.ON  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Turnaround Polling - continued  
Enter the Security  
Code  
Dial the Number of  
Remote Facsimile  
Complete the  
Procedure  
Select the Security  
Code Option  
6
7
8
5
Select the security code option.  
Enter the 4-digit security code  
for the document to be re-  
trieved.  
Enter the number of the remote  
facsimile using any of the follow-  
ing dialing methods.  
The facsimile will dial the re-  
mote facsimile to perform an or-  
dinary transmission. When the  
transmission is complete, poll-  
ing of the document from the re-  
mote facsimile will start immedi-  
ately.  
If the remote facsimile is a  
TOSHIBA facsimile and a 4-digit  
security code is programmed to  
the document to be polled, se-  
lect “1. YES” by pressing:  
• One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
• Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
When the polling operation is  
complete, the Turnaround Poll-  
ing setting is automatically can-  
celled.  
• Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
Go to Step 6.  
• Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
If the remote facsimile is not a  
TOSHIBA facsimile or no secu-  
rity Codes are in use, select “2.  
NO” by pressing:  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
SECURITY CODE  
[****]  
When the 4-digit security code  
is entered, press:  
Go to Step 7.  
Go to Step 7.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Continuous Polling  
Use this procedure to poll the  
same remote facsimile(s) on a  
regular schedule. Continuous  
Polling operations can be pro-  
grammed for specific time inter-  
vals on the days selected. In ad-  
dition, a 4-digit security code  
can be used with other TOSHI-  
BA facsimiles when the docu-  
ment has a security code pro-  
grammed.  
Display the  
POLLING Menu  
Select PROG. CONT.  
POLL.  
Enter the Polling  
Interval  
Enter the Start and  
Stop Time  
1
2
3
4
Press:  
Select “04.PROG. CONT.  
POLL.” by pressing:  
Enter the time interval between Enter the polling start and stop  
polling sequences (10 to 70 time.  
minutes).  
+
+
Only interval settings of 10-  
minute increments are permis-  
sible. (Example: Enter “1” for  
10 minutes or “2” for 20 min-  
utes, etc.)  
+
NOTES:  
•
•
•
Calls are performed with-  
in the set time period on  
the days selected with  
the set interval between  
callings.  
When the time period is dis-  
played correctly, press:  
POLLING  
01.POLLING  
INTERVAL  
(10-70)  
[ 0]  
If multiple sending sta-  
tions are programmed,  
callings are performed to  
all those stations within  
the set time period.  
02.POLLING RESERVE  
03.TURNAROUND POLL  
04.PROG. CONT. POLL.  
NOTES:  
If the polling operation  
exceeds the set time pe-  
riod, it will continue until  
all the facsimiles have  
been polled.  
Then press:  
• You may use  
/
to  
move the cursor left and  
right.  
•
•
•
Redialing or calling to al-  
ternate dialing numbers is  
not available during this  
operation.  
• If the 12-hour format is se-  
lected, you may use the  
START/STOP TIME  
[08:00AM-05:00PM]  
/
keys to se-  
If a power failure occurs  
during this procedure, the  
polling continues when  
power is restored.  
lect AM or PM.  
START/STOP DAYS  
[MON-FRI]  
↑↓  
If the set time period is  
shorter than the set call-  
ing interval, polling will be  
performed only once at  
the start time.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Continuous Polling - continued  
Select the Day of the  
Week  
Enter the Number of  
Remote Facsimile  
Select the Security  
Code Option  
Enter the Security  
Code  
5
6
7
8
Select the day of the week to Enter the number of the remote  
start polling. When the day-of- facsimile using any of the fol-  
week range is displayed cor- lowing dialing methods.  
rectly, press:  
When all the remote facsimile  
locations have been entered in  
Step 6, press:  
Enter the 4-digit security code  
for the document to be re-  
trieved.  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
ADD SECURITY CODE  
1.YES  
NOTES:  
• To designate the start or  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
2.NO  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
end day, use  
/
to  
If all of the remote facsimiles are  
TOSHIBA facsimiles and the  
same 4-digit security code is  
programmed to the documents  
move the entry point.  
ONE TOUCH=  
PORTLAND PLANT  
24  
ADD SECURITY CODE  
[****]  
• Press  
/
to  
change the day.  
to be polled, press  
go to Step 8.  
and  
After each entry, the selected  
facsimile is displayed for 2 sec-  
onds.  
When the 4-digit security code  
is entered, press:  
If the remote facsimile is not a  
TOSHIBA facsimile or no Secu-  
rity Codes are in use, press:  
PROG. CONT. POLL  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
PROG. CONT. POLL  
ONE TOUCH=  
24  
The procedure is now complete.  
The display returns to the  
Standby Mode.  
The facsimile will automatically  
start polling at the time set in  
this procedure.  
Repeat this procedure until all  
remote facsimiles are entered.  
No Security Code will be se-  
lected and the facsimile will re-  
turn to the Standby Mode.  
The facsimile will automatically  
start polling at the time set in  
this procedure.  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
- MAILBOX (ITU-T Compatible)  
This section describes the pro-  
cedures to setup a Mailbox in  
the DP80F/DP85F hub unit. Us-  
Setting Up a Mailbox  
ing this function, all ITU-T F-  
code compliant facsimiles can  
reserve, transmit, or retrieve  
documents to and from the  
DP80F/DP85F. Mailboxes must  
be setup prior to utilizing the  
DP80F/DP85F as an Mailbox  
Hub. For more information, see  
page 119. Two Types of Mail-  
boxes are available.  
Display the MAILBOX  
Menu  
Select SETUP &  
DELETE  
Select MAILBOX  
SETUP  
Select the Mailbox  
Type  
1
2
3
4
Press:  
Select “04.SETUP & DELETE”  
by pressing:  
Select the desired type of Mail-  
box.  
Select “1.MAILBOX SETUP” by  
pressing:  
To select Confidential Box,  
press:  
+
+
+
•
Confidential Box  
Confidential box allows  
a
one time document retrieval  
from the mailbox. Once a  
document is retrieved, it is  
cleared. A document retrieval  
password for accessing the  
Confidential Box can be add-  
ed during setup.  
To select Bulletin Board Box,  
press:  
It is important to note that a  
password is required to re-  
trieve a document from a  
Confidential mailbox using a  
remote facsimile. If the con-  
tents of this mailbox are to  
be polled remotely, a pass-  
word must be used. A pass-  
word is not mandatory if the  
contents are to be printed lo-  
cally.  
ITU MAILBOX  
01.CONFIDENTIAL  
SETUP & DELETE  
1.MAILBOX SETUP  
MAILBOX TYPE  
1.CONFIDENTIAL TYPE  
BOX NUMBER  
[
]
02.BULLETIN BOARD  
2.MAILBOX DELETE  
3.DONE  
2.BULLETIN BOARD  
03.RELAY REQUEST  
04.SETUP & DELETE  
•
Bulletin Board Box  
Bulletin Board box allows  
multiple document retrievals  
from the mailbox. It is possi-  
ble to add a password re-  
quirement for document res-  
ervation so that only users  
with the correct password  
can reserve documents.  
The password is not required  
to retrieve documents from  
the Bulletin Board Box.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up a Mailbox - continued  
Enter the Box  
Number  
Select the Password  
Option  
Enter the Password  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
5
6
7
8
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other settings referring  
to their associated pages for in-  
structions, or press  
Enter the Mailbox number (max.  
20 digits).  
Select whether or not to use the Enter the password (max. 20  
password option for this mail- digits).  
box.  
To set the password option for  
this mailbox, press:  
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
Go to Step 7.  
If you do not wish to set the  
password option with this mail-  
Then press:  
PASSWORD  
[*****  
box, press:  
]
Then press:  
SETUP PASSWORD  
1.YES  
Go to Step 8.  
2.NO  
NOTES:  
•
If you selected the Confiden-  
COMPLETED  
tial Box in Step 4, a pass-  
word must be used if the  
document is to be retrieved  
remotely. The remote fac-  
simile will require its opera-  
tor to enter this password  
before being able to retrieve  
the document.  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Return to Step 3.  
•
If you selected the Bulletin  
Board Box in Step 4, assign-  
ing a password will require a  
password to be entered be-  
fore any documents can be  
reserved into the Bulletin  
Board Box.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Deleting a Mailbox  
This section describes the pro-  
cedures to delete an existing  
Mailbox in a DP80F/DP85F hub  
unit.  
Display the MAILBOX  
Menu  
Select SETUP &  
DELETE  
Select MAILBOX  
DELETE  
Enter the Box  
Number  
1
2
3
4
Press:  
Select “04.SETUP & DELETE”  
by pressing:  
Enter the Box number (max. 20  
digits) of the Mailbox you want  
to delete.  
Select “2.MAILBOX DELETE”  
by pressing:  
NOTE:  
If a document exists in the  
Mailbox you want to delete,  
this operation is not allowed  
until the document is re-  
trieved, printed, or cancelled  
from the Mailbox.  
+
+
+
ITU MAILBOX  
SETUP & DELETE  
1.MAILBOX SETUP  
BOX NUMBER  
[
Then press:  
01.CONFIDENTIAL  
02.BULLETIN BOARD  
03.RELAY REQUEST  
]
2.MAILBOX DELETE  
3.DONE  
If the entered Box number does  
04.SETUP & DELETE  
not have  
a
password pro-  
grammed, go to Step 6.  
If the entered Box number has  
a password programmed, the  
screen below is displayed.  
Go to Step 5.  
PASSWORD  
[
]
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Deleting a Mailbox - continued  
Enter the Password  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
5
6
Enter the Password (max. 20).  
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other settings referring  
to their associated pages for in-  
structions, or press  
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
PASSWORD  
[*****  
]
Then press:  
DELETED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Return to Step 3.  
NOTE:  
Make sure that the correct  
password is entered. Other-  
wise, the machine will inform  
you that the password is in-  
correct.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending a Document to a Mailbox (Remote Hub)  
This section describes the pro-  
Load the Document  
Display the MAILBOX  
Menu  
Select the Mailbox Type  
cedures to send a document to  
a remote hub unit’s Confidential  
Box, or reserve a document to a  
Bulletin Board Box in a remote  
hub unit. The remote hub unit  
must be compliant with ITU-T F-  
code communications. For more  
information, see page 119.  
1
2
3
Load the document face down Press:  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Select the desired type of Mail-  
box.  
To reserve the document to a  
Bulletin Board Box, press:  
To send the document to a Con-  
fidential Box, press:  
+
+
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
+
NOTE:  
The destination mailbox  
number must be setup in the  
remote hub unit prior to  
sending document.  
+
ITU MAILBOX  
BULLETIN BOARD  
1.PRINT MAILBOX  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
CONFIDENTIAL  
1.PRINT MAILBOX  
01.CONFIDENTIAL  
02.BULLETIN BOARD  
03.RELAY REQUEST  
2.SEND TO MAILBOX  
3.POLL FROM MAILBOX  
4.STORE TO MAILBOX  
5.DELETE CONTENTS  
2.SEND TO MAILBOX  
3.POLL FROM MAILBOX  
4.STORE TO MAILBOX  
5.DELETE CONTENTS  
04.SETUP & DELETE  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending a Document to a Mailbox (Remote Hub) - continued  
Select SEND TO  
MAILBOX  
Enter the Box  
Number  
Enter the Password  
for Reservation  
Dial the Remote Hub  
Unit  
Complete the  
Procedure  
4
5
6
7
8
Select “2. SEND TO MAILBOX” Enter the Box Number (max. 20 Enter the password to access  
Enter the facsimile number of The facsimile starts scanning  
the remote hub unit using any of the document into memory. The  
by pressing:  
digits).  
the Bulletin Board Box.  
the following dialing methods.  
following screen is displayed for  
about 2 seconds before return-  
ing to the Standby Mode.  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
SCANNING DOC. P001  
BOX NUMBER  
FILE NBR =  
231  
[
]
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
Then press:  
Then press:  
If you are sending to a Confi-  
dential Box, go to Step 7.  
SEND(BULLETIN BOARD)  
ENTER FAX NUMBER  
TEL NUMBER=(MAX128)  
[123  
]
SEND(CONFIDENTIAL)  
ENTER FAX NUMBER  
If you are sending to a Bulletin  
Board, go to Step 6.  
PASSWORD  
[
]
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reserving a Document to a Mailbox (Local Hub)  
This section describes the pro-  
cedure to reserve a document to  
the DP80F/DP85F’s Confiden-  
tial Box or Bulletin Board Box.  
Load the Document  
Display the MAILBOX  
Menu  
Select the Mailbox Type  
1
2
3
Select the desired type of Mail-  
box.  
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Press:  
To reserve the document to a  
Bulletin Board Box, press:  
NOTE:  
Before a document can be  
reserved to a mailbox; that  
mailbox must first be setup.  
See page 132.  
To reserve the document to a  
Confidential Box, press:  
+
+
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
+
+
BULLETIN BOARD  
1.PRINT MAILBOX  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
ITU MAILBOX  
01.CONFIDENTIAL  
CONFIDENTIAL  
1.PRINT MAILBOX  
2.SEND TO MAILBOX  
3.POLL FROM MAILBOX  
4.STORE TO MAILBOX  
5.DELETE CONTENTS  
02.BULLETIN BOARD  
2.SEND TO MAILBOX  
3.POLL FROM MAILBOX  
4.STORE TO MAILBOX  
5.DELETE CONTENTS  
03.RELAY REQUEST  
04.SETUP & DELETE  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reserving a Document to a Mailbox (Local Hub) - continued  
Select STORE TO  
MAILBOX  
Enter the Box  
Number  
Enter the Password  
for Reservation  
Complete the  
Procedure  
4
5
6
7
Select “4.STORE TO MAILBOX” Enter the Box Number (max. 20  
Enter the password to access  
the Bulletin Board Box.  
The facsimile starts scanning  
the document into memory. The  
following screen is displayed for  
about 2 seconds before return-  
ing to the Standby Mode.  
by pressing:  
digits).  
BOX NUMBER  
SCANNING DOC. P001  
[
]
FILE NBR =  
231  
Then press:  
PASSWORD  
[****  
]
If you are reserving to a Confi-  
dential Box, go to Step 7.  
Then press:  
If you are reserving to a Bulletin  
Board Box, go to Step 6.  
PASSWORD  
[
]
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Retrieving (Polling) a Document from a Mailbox (Remote Hub)  
This section describes the pro-  
Display the  
MAILBOX Menu  
Select the Mailbox Type  
Select POLL FROM  
MAILBOX  
cedure to retrieve a document  
from a Confidential Box or Bulle-  
tin Board Box in a remote hub  
unit.  
1
2
3
Select the desired type of Mail-  
box.  
Select “3.POLL FROM MAIL-  
BOX” by pressing:  
Press:  
To retrieve a document in a  
Bulletin Board Box, press:  
To retrieve a document in a  
Confidential Box, press:  
+
+
+
+
BOX NUMBER  
[
ITU MAILBOX  
01.CONFIDENTIAL  
CONFIDENTIAL  
1.PRINT MAILBOX  
BULLETIN BOARD  
1.PRINT MAILBOX  
]
02.BULLETIN BOARD  
2.SEND TO MAILBOX  
3.POLL FROM MAILBOX  
4.STORE TO MAILBOX  
5.DELETE CONTENTS  
2.SEND TO MAILBOX  
3.POLL FROM MAILBOX  
4.STORE TO MAILBOX  
5.DELETE CONTENTS  
03.RELAY REQUEST  
04.SETUP & DELETE  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Retrieving a Document from a Mailbox (Remote Hub) - continued  
Enter the Password  
Dial the Remote Hub  
Unit  
Complete the  
Procedure  
Enter the Box  
Number  
5
6
7
4
The facsimile starts dialing the  
remote hub unit to retrieve the  
document. The following screen  
is displayed for about 2 seconds  
before returning to the Standby  
Mode.  
Enter the Box Number (max. 20  
digits).  
Enter the password to access  
the Confidential Box.  
Enter the facsimile number of  
the remote hub unit using any  
of the following dialing meth-  
ods.  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
Then press:  
Then press:  
If you are retrieving from a Con-  
fidential Box, go to Step 5.  
POLL(CONFIDENTIAL)  
ENTER FAX NUMBER  
TEL NUMBER=(MAX128)  
[123  
OPERATION COMPLETED  
]
FILE NBR =  
234  
PASSWORD  
[
]
If you are retrieving from a Bul-  
letin Board Box, go to Step 6.  
POLL(BULLETIN BOARD)  
ENTER FAX NUMBER  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing a Document from a Mailbox (Local Hub)  
This section describes the pro-  
Display the  
MAILBOX Menu  
Select the Mailbox Type  
Select PRINT  
MAILBOX  
cedure to retrieve a document  
from a local DP80F/DP85F’s  
Confidential Box or Bulletin  
Board Box. For more informa-  
tion, see page 132.  
1
2
3
To print the contents of a Bulle- Select “1.PRINT MAILBOX” by  
tin Board Box, press:  
pressing:  
Press:  
Select the desired type of Mail-  
box.  
To print the contents of a Confi-  
dential Box, press:  
+
+
+
+
ITU MAILBOX  
CONFIDENTIAL  
1.PRINT MAILBOX  
BOX NUMBER  
[
BULLETIN BOARD  
1.PRINT MAILBOX  
01.CONFIDENTIAL  
02.BULLETIN BOARD  
03.RELAY REQUEST  
]
2.SEND TO MAILBOX  
3.POLL FROM MAILBOX  
4.STORE TO MAILBOX  
5.DELETE CONTENTS  
2.SEND TO MAILBOX  
3.POLL FROM MAILBOX  
4.STORE TO MAILBOX  
5.DELETE CONTENTS  
04.SETUP & DELETE  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing a Document from a Mailbox (Local Hub) - continued  
Enter the Box  
Number  
Enter the Password  
Complete the  
Procedure  
4
5
6
Enter the Box Number (max. 20  
digits).  
Enter the password to access The facsimile starts printing the  
the Confidential Box.  
document. The following screen  
is displayed during the printing  
sequence before returning to the  
Standby Mode.  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 80%  
PRINTING  
Then press:  
Then press:  
If you are printing from a Confi-  
dential Box, go to Step 5.  
PASSWORD  
[
]
If you are printing from a Bulletin  
Board Box, go to Step 6.  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cancelling Documents in a Mailbox (Local Hub)  
This section describes the pro-  
cedure to cancel the docu-  
Display the  
MAILBOX Menu  
Select the Mailbox Type  
Select CANCEL  
MAILBOX  
1
2
3
ments stored in the DP80F/  
DP85F. This operation will  
erase all existing documents in  
each Mailbox, but not erase the  
Mailbox itself.  
Select the desired type of Mail-  
box.  
Press:  
To delete the contents of a Bul- Select “5.DELETE CONTENTS”  
letin Board Box, press: by pressing:  
To delete the contents of a  
Confidential Box, press:  
+
+
+
+
ITU MAILBOX  
01.CONFIDENTIAL  
CONFIDENTIAL  
1.PRINT MAILBOX  
BULLETIN BOARD  
1.PRINT MAILBOX  
BOX NUMBER  
[
]
02.BULLETIN BOARD  
2.SEND TO MAILBOX  
3.POLL FROM MAILBOX  
4.STORE TO MAILBOX  
5.DELETE CONTENTS  
2.SEND TO MAILBOX  
3.POLL FROM MAILBOX  
4.STORE TO MAILBOX  
5.DELETE CONTENTS  
03.RELAY REQUEST  
04.SETUP & DELETE  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cancelling Documents in a Mailbox (Local Hub) - continued  
Enter the Box  
Number  
Enter the Password  
Complete the  
Procedure  
4
5
6
Enter the Box Number (max. 20  
digits).  
Enter the password to access  
Confidential Box.  
The facsimile will display the  
following screen for approxi-  
mately 2 seconds before re-  
turning to the Standby Mode.  
DELETED  
Then press:  
PASSWORD  
[*****  
]
If you are cancelling the con-  
tents of a Box with a password  
assigned, go to Step 5.  
Then press:  
If you are cancelling the con-  
tents of a Box with no password  
assigned, go to Step 6.  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
- ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FUNCTIONS  
Department Code Access  
This procedure assumes that  
DEPT CODE  
Standby Menu  
Enter the  
Department Code  
Complete the  
Procedure  
you have selected and config-  
ured Department Codes on pag-  
es 52 and 54 of this manual.  
1
2
3
The Department Code Standby Enter the 5-digit Department  
If the password you have en-  
tered is valid, the ordinary  
Standby Mode screen (as  
shown below) will be displayed.  
Access will be limited to one  
transmission job or one Opera-  
tion Panel function (printing a  
list, accessing a Mailbox, etc.)  
Once selected, the use of the  
facsimile is limited to authorized  
personnel only.  
menu is shown below.  
Code preset for your depart-  
ment.  
NOTE:  
The usage for each depart-  
ment is recorded on the De-  
partment Control List (see  
page 203).  
If the password does not match,  
verify your password and re-en-  
ter.  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 80%  
ENTER DEPT CODE  
ENTER DEPT CODE  
[*****]  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
Then press:  
NOTE:  
Upon entering a valid 5-digit  
password,  
the  
standby  
prompt will remain on the  
LCD for one operation or one  
minute whichever occurs  
first.  
NOTE:  
If you do not have a valid De-  
partment Code Password,  
you cannot access this fac-  
simile.  
Contact the key operator or  
supervisor for more informa-  
tion.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Account Code Entry  
This procedure assumes that  
you have enabled the Account  
Code option on page 56 of this  
manual.  
Load the Document  
Enter the Facsimile  
Number  
Enter an Account  
Code  
Complete the  
Procedure  
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Enter the number of the remote Enter the 4-digit Account Code.  
facsimile using any of the fol-  
lowing dialing methods.  
The facsimile starts scanning  
the document into memory.  
When the document scanning is  
complete, the display returns to  
the Standby Mode.  
Once enabled, the facsimile will  
prompt for an Account Code  
prior to dialing the remote party.  
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
The entered Account Code will  
be printed in the Account Code  
column on the Activity Journal.  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
NOTES:  
• “Account Code” tracking is  
only possible when using  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
memory  
(Memory  
communications  
Transmission,  
Polling Receptions, etc.).  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
ENTER ACCOUNT CODE  
ENTER ACCOUNT CODE  
[****]  
SCANNING DOC. P001  
[
]
FILE NBR =  
244  
• Once entered, an Account  
Code is only effective for  
that communication proce-  
dure. It will automatically  
clear upon completion of  
the communication, upon  
job cancellation, or upon a  
communication error.  
Then press:  
NOTE:  
It is possible to send a docu-  
ment without entering an Ac-  
count Code. Simply press  
or  
.
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chain Dialing  
This allows you to dial tele-  
phone/facsimile numbers that  
may require many digits with  
pauses for voice prompts or  
variations in number sequences  
such as long distance access  
codes, or specialized access  
lines. You can combine sets of  
numbers (Abbreviated Dialing,  
Alphabet Dialing, One Touch Di-  
aling, and Keypad Dialing) and  
pauses in a “Chained” dial se-  
quence by using the Chain Dial  
Key.  
Load the Document  
Display the CHAIN  
DIAL COMM. Menu  
Enter the Dial  
Number  
Press the START  
Key  
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down Select the direct function access Start constructing your dialing When all the required entries  
in the Document Support (see button on the Operation Panel.  
page 82).  
sequence using any of the fol- are made, press:  
lowing dialing methods. You  
may use them consecutively un-  
til your entire dialing string has  
been entered. After each entry  
sequence, the LCD screen dis-  
plays the screen shown in step  
Press:  
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
The facsimile starts scanning  
2.  
the document into memory, dis-  
playing the screen shown be-  
low. When document scanning  
is complete, the display returns  
to the Standby Mode.  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
If your operation requires paus-  
ing for voice prompts, you will  
need to insert pause signals be-  
tween dial strings.  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
CHAIN DIAL COMM.  
ENTER TEL NUMBER.  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
To determine the correct  
amount of time for your pauses,  
you should perform the opera-  
SCANNING DOC. P001  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
FILE NBR =  
108  
tion using  
first. This way  
•
Pause Signal  
you will know how many 3-sec-  
ond pauses will be required.  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting for Memory Transmission  
Memory Transmission allows  
Display the  
MEMORY TX Menu  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
Select the  
Transmission Mode  
your facsimile to quickly scan  
documents to memory and re-  
turn them to you. You do not  
have to wait for the transmission  
to be completed. This increases  
productivity as others do not  
have to wait in line to send a  
facsimile.  
1
3
2
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other settings referring  
to their associated pages for in-  
structions, or press  
Press:  
Select the desired transmission  
mode.  
To set Memory Transmission to  
ON, press:  
+
+
+
+
Each time you send a facsimile  
with memory transmission, the  
amount of residual memory will  
be reduced.  
To set Memory Transmission to  
OFF, press:  
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
Additionally, each time you send  
a memory transmission, a com-  
munication reservation or File  
Number is assigned.  
When Memory Transmission is  
not selected, the Direct Docu-  
ment Transmission (tray) mode  
is active by default. This allows  
your facsimile to function without  
the use of document memory.  
COMPLETED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
MEMORY TX  
1.ON  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
2.OFF  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Setting for Security Transmission  
This function allows transmis-  
sions only when the number you  
Display the  
SECURITY TX Menu  
Select the Desired  
Option  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
1
2
3
dial matches the number pro-  
grammed in the remote fac-  
simile. If the numbers do not  
match, Security Transmission  
prevents your facsimile from  
sending by indicating a trans-  
mission error.  
Press:  
Select the desired option.  
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other settings referring  
to their associated pages for in-  
structions, or press  
To set Security Transmission to  
ON, press:  
+
+
+
+
To set Security Transmission to  
OFF, press:  
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
COMPLETED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
SECURITY TX  
2.OFF  
1.ON  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cover Sheet Registration  
This function enables the at-  
tachment of a cover sheet to the  
document being transmitted.  
Display the COVER  
SHEET Menu  
Enable / Disable the  
Cover Sheet  
Include an Image on  
the Cover Sheet  
Load the Image  
Document  
1
2
3
4
Prior to selecting this function  
for the first time, you may wish  
to prepare a Cover Sheet image  
(Logo) to be used on the cover  
sheet. See Step 4 of this proce-  
dure.  
Press:  
Enable or Disable the Cover  
Sheet attachment.  
To include an image (a scanned Load the image document to be  
company logo, etc.), press:  
included on the cover sheet.  
NOTE:  
+
+
+
+
In preparing a document for  
your cover sheet image, only  
a limited area of the sheet  
will be included as shown  
below. Any data out of the  
specified range will be disre-  
garded.  
(for YES)  
LOAD DOCUMENT  
Go to Step 4.  
(for ON-Enable)  
(for OFF-Disable)  
Effective  
Range  
5.9 in.  
(150mm)  
When “ON” is selected, the fol-  
lowing screen is displayed.  
To omit an image on the cover  
sheet, press:  
LOAD DOCUMENT  
1.YES  
2.NO  
Feed  
Direction  
(for NO)  
When “NO” is selected, the  
“COMPLETED” message will be  
displayed. The facsimile returns  
to the Standby Mode.  
When “OFF” is selected, the  
“COMPLETED” message will be  
displayed. The facsimile returns  
to the Standby Mode.  
When the document is pulled  
into the appropriate position,  
the following screen is dis-  
played.  
COVER SHEET  
2.OFF  
1.ON  
PRESS [START]  
Press:  
Image Area  
When scanning is complete, the  
facsimile returns to the Standby  
Mode.  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Recovery Transmission  
Recovery Transmission allows  
Display the  
Select the Recovery  
Transmit Option  
Enter the STORED  
TIME  
the operator to re-transmit a  
document after failing the ini-  
tially specified number of redial  
attempts.  
1
2
3
RECOVERY  
TRANSMIT Menu  
Press:  
To turn ON Recovery Transmis-  
sion, press:  
Enter the stored time length (01  
to 24, in unit of hours).  
If Recovery Transmission is set  
to ON, the document is stored in  
memory for a specified length of  
time. You may retransmit the  
document within this time period  
without re-scanning the original  
document.  
+
+
+
+
Go to Step 3.  
To turn OFF Recovery Trans-  
mission, press:  
Then press:  
When “OFF” is selected, the  
“COMPLETED” message will be  
displayed. The facsimile returns  
to the Standby Mode.  
When completed, the following  
screen is displayed. Press  
to return to the Standby  
Mode.  
RECOVERY TX  
2.ON  
STORE TIME  
(1-24)  
COMPLETED  
[ 8]  
1.OFF  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TTI (Transmit Terminal ID) Print  
To properly identify the sender of your documents, the DP80F/DP85F prints a transmission header (TTI) on the recording paper of the remote facsimile. The information  
included in the TTI are:  
•
Date and Start Time  
The date and start time when this document was sent to the remote facsimile.  
•
•
Transmitting Station ID Name (see page 42)  
Transmission Serial Number  
With each transmission, the DP80F/DP85F automatically assigns a unique transmission number. This number is also printed on the Activity Journals.  
•
•
Page Number/Total Number of Pages  
Each page of the document is printed with a page number followed by the total number of pages in the document (e.g. 001/003 means the first page of three total pages).  
File Number  
Each document sent from memory is assigned a file number. This file number is used by the DP80F/DP85F to assist you in managing multiple document jobs.  
Total Page  
Number  
Transmission  
Serial Number  
Date  
Transmission  
Station ID Name  
Page  
Number  
Start Time  
File Number  
05-17-2000 10:00 FROM: TOSHIBA  
+1-714-583-0000  
T-123 P.001/003 F-030  
You can select the following options for your TTI information.  
•
•
•
Inside  
The document is sent to the receiver with the TTI included in the document data. Accordingly, if any characters exist near the top edge of the sending data, they may be  
overlapped with the TTI.  
Outside  
The document is sent to the receiver with the TTI to be printed outside the sending data. Accordingly, if any characters exist near the top edge of the sending data, the TTI  
and the sending data will not overlap in transmission.  
Off  
IMPORTANT NOTE:  
The U.S. Federal Communication Commission (FCC) requires that anyone sending a facsimile message must identify themselves (or company), give their facsimile telephone  
number, and provide the date and time of the transmission. This information must be on the lead-edge of, at least, the first page of the facsimile transmission.  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TTI (Transmit Terminal ID) Print - continued  
Display the TTI  
Menu  
Select the TTI Print  
Option  
1
2
Select the TTI Print option.  
To select INSIDE, press:  
Press:  
+
+
+
+
To select OUTSIDE, press:  
To select OFF, press:  
The display shows the screen  
below to indicate that the menu  
selection is completed.  
To return to the Standy Mode,  
press  
.
TTI  
COMPLETED  
1.INSIDE  
2.OUTSIDE  
3.OFF  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Send after Scan Default Setting  
This feature enables you to de-  
Display the SEND  
AFTER SCAN Menu  
Select the Send  
After Scan Option  
Select the Memory  
Full Option  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
termine whether the dialing  
starts while the machine is  
scanning the documents or after  
the machine has scanned all  
documents in the Memory Send  
mode.  
Also, if dialing after scanning is  
selected, you can select to de-  
lete or send the scanned pages  
when the memory becomes full  
during scanning.  
1
2
3
4
Press:  
Select the desired Send After Select the desired Memory Full  
Scan Option. Option.  
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other settings referring  
to their associated pages for in-  
structions, or press  
To enable Send After Scan, To cancel the page being  
press:  
+
+
+
+
scanned, press:  
To send the pages being  
scanned, press:  
UPON MEMORY FULL  
1.CANCEL SENDING  
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
2.SEND SCANNED PAGES  
Go to Step 3.  
COMPLETED  
To disable Send After Scan,  
press:  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
SEND AFTER SCAN  
2.OFF  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
The following is displayed for 2  
seconds.  
1.ON  
COMPLETED  
Go to Step 4.  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Document Length Setting  
This setting enables or disables  
Display the  
Select the Document  
Length Option  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
the DP80F/DP85F sending doc-  
uments longer than 1 Meter  
(39.4”). The default setting en-  
ables the 1 Meter (39.4”) limit.  
1
2
3
DOCUMENT LENGTH  
Menu  
Select the Document Length op-  
tion.  
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other settings referring  
to their associated pages for in-  
structions, or press  
Press:  
NOTE:  
To select 1m, press:  
If you select “Any Length”,  
the machine will be unable to  
detect a document jam.  
+
+
+
+
To select ANY LENGTH, press:  
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
DOCUMENT LENGTH  
1.1M (39 INCHES)  
COMPLETED  
2.ANY LENGTH  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PIN Mask  
Some telephone PBX (Private  
Branch Exchange) systems can  
track and monitor all outgoing  
calls made by a facsimile. This  
is done by entering a PIN code  
after dialing the destination fac-  
simile number.  
Load the Document  
Enter the Facsimile  
Number  
Press the CHARGE  
CODE Key  
Enter the PIN  
Number  
1
2
3
4
Enter the number of the remote  
facsimile.  
Press the CHARGE CODE key  
to initiate the PIN number se-  
quence. A “+” will be displayed  
on the LCD display.  
Enter the PIN number.  
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
The Toshiba DP80F/DP85F fa-  
cilitates the telephone PBX sys-  
tem by masking the PIN entered  
with a “$” on both the LCD and  
TX Reports/Journals.  
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
NOTE:  
This feature is limited to key-  
pad dialing.  
This feature is not available  
with Abbreviated, Alphabet,  
or One Touch Key dialing.  
The PIN number entered is  
masked with “$” displayed on  
the LCD display.  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
TEL NUMBER=(MAX 128)  
TEL NUMBER=(MAX 128)  
[17145551212  
]
[17145551212+  
]
When the entry is complete,  
press  
.
TEL NUMBER=(MAX 128)  
[17145551212+$$$$ ]  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
- ADVANCED RECEPTION FUNCTIONS  
Secure Reception Access Code Setting  
There are occasions when you  
Display the SECURE  
RX Menu  
Select the SECURE  
RX Option  
Enter the Current  
Security Code  
Enter a New  
Security Code  
may wish to secure access to  
incoming documents. Secure  
RX allows you to receive docu-  
ments to memory until a security  
code is entered. This ensures  
that only users with the correct  
security code may retrieve  
documents. In addition, Secure  
RX can be setup to automati-  
cally activate during a specified  
time period.  
1
2
3
4
Press:  
To select a security code for the Before you change the security  
first time or to change an exist- code, you must enter the exist-  
ing security code, press:  
Enter your new 4-digit security  
code.  
ing code to gain access. Enter  
the current security code.  
+
+
+
+
+
To setup Secure RX, a 4-digit  
security code must be pro-  
grammed first. After program-  
ming the security code, you can  
specify the time period during  
which Secure RX will be active.  
24-hour coverage for specific  
days of the week is selectable.  
This section describes the pro-  
cedure for programming a secu-  
rity code or changing an existing  
security code.  
If the security code already ex-  
ists and you wish to change the  
current code, go to Step 3.  
Then press:  
When you enter a security code  
for the first time, go to Step 4.  
Then press:  
If a new code needs to be en-  
tered:  
If a code already exists:  
COMPLETED  
Go to Step 4.  
If the correct code is entered,  
following is displayed.  
SECURE RX  
01.SECURITY CODE  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
NEW SECURITY CODE  
02.SECURE RX  
[
]
NEW SECURITY CODE  
[
]
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
ENTER SECURITY CODE  
[
]
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Secure Reception Access Code Setting - continued  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
5
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other settings referring  
to their associated pages for in-  
structions, or press  
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Secure RX Activation Period Setting  
This section describes the pro-  
Display the SECURE  
RX Menu  
Select the SECURE  
RX Option  
Enter the Security  
Code  
Activate the  
Automatic Secure RX  
cedure to setup the DP80F/  
DP85F to automatically activate  
Secure RX during a specified  
time period. Prior to setting this  
option, you must have a securi-  
ty code set in the facsimile.  
1
2
3
4
Press:  
To set the activity period for Se-  
cure RX, press:  
Enter the current security code.  
To activate Secure RX, press:  
+
+
+
+
NOTE:  
+
If a security code is not set,  
the DP80F/DP85F automati-  
cally prompts the security  
code setting. See the pre-  
ceding section for details on  
setting the security code.  
MONDAY  
1.ALL DAY  
2.FIXED TIME  
NOTE:  
If a security code is not set,  
the DP80F/DP85F automati-  
cally prompts the security  
code setting. See the pre-  
ceding section for details on  
setting the security code.  
Go to Step 5.  
Then press:  
To de-activate Secure RX,  
press:  
SECURITY CODE  
SECURE RX  
2.OFF  
Then press:  
[
]
SECURE RX  
1.SECURITY CODE  
1.ON  
02.SECURE RX  
to return to the Standby Mode.  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Secure RX Activation Period Setting - continued  
Set for Each Day  
Enter the Start and  
End Time  
Complete the  
Procedure  
5
6
7
To set Secure RX for the entire  
24-hour-period for the day dis-  
played, press:  
Enter the time period (start time The following is displayed for 2  
and end time) subject to auto- seconds.  
matic activation using the fol-  
lowing keys.  
Press  
to return to the  
Standby Mode.  
To move the entry  
point to the left or  
right.  
If you select “1.ALL DAY” for ev-  
ery day of the week, you will go  
to Step 7.  
COMPLETED  
To enter the  
desired nu-  
meric value  
for each time  
digit.  
To specify a time period for Se-  
cure Rx operation on this day,  
press:  
Repeat this step until you select  
ALL DAY or FIXED TIME for  
each day of the week (up to  
Sunday).  
To change the time-  
of-day forward or  
backward when the  
12-hour system is  
used.  
If you selected “2.FIXED TIME”  
for any day of the week, you will  
go to Step 6 after selecting the  
options for seven days of the  
week.  
When the start time and end  
time of the desired period is dis-  
played correctly, press:  
NOTE:  
The day of the week is  
shown in the LCD. Selecting  
ALL DAY for Monday means  
Secure RX will be active for  
the entire 24 hours of Mon-  
day.  
START/STOP TIME  
[10:00PM-09:00AM]  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory Reception Setting  
When the printer becomes unavailable during a document recep-  
tion, due to a recording paper jam, toner empty or other error condi-  
tion, this facsimile backs up the received data by storing it in  
memory.  
Display MEMORY  
RX Menu  
Select the Memory  
Reception Option  
1
2
Press:  
To set Memory Reception ON,  
press:  
The document data is received and stored in memory. The nature of  
trouble is indicated on the LCD display with an ALARM lamp blink-  
ing.  
+
+
+
+
MAY-17 09:43 AM 90%  
PAPER EMPTY  
To set Memory Reception to  
OFF, press:  
To retrieve the data stored in memory, simply correct the error con-  
dition (such as refill your paper tray with recording paper). Your  
document will be printed automatically.  
When the setting is complete,  
the following screen is dis-  
played. To return to the Standby  
NOTES:  
•
The default setting is ON.  
Mode, press  
.
•
When OFF is selected, no receptions will be possible should  
the paper supply be exhausted or a paper jam occurs.  
•
Note that Memory Reception will not occur when the residual  
memory is zero. When the residual memory becomes zero  
during a Memory Reception, document reception will stop  
and no further receptions are possible until memory becomes  
available.  
MEMORY RX  
1.ON  
COMPLETED  
2.OFF  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reception-Reduction Setting  
This function allows the reduc-  
Display the SET RX  
REDUCTION Menu  
Select the Desired  
Option  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
1
2
3
tion of the received image, if  
the received document is  
larger than the recording pa-  
per.  
Press:  
To set RX Reduction to ON, After completing this Configura-  
press:  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other settings referring  
to their associated pages for in-  
structions, or press  
+
+
+
+
To set RX Reduction to OFF,  
press:  
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
COMPLETED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
RX REDUCTION  
1.ON  
2.OFF  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reception-Discard Setting  
This function allows up to 13  
Display the  
DISCARD Menu  
Select the Desired  
Option  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
mm* of the lower portion of the  
document to be discarded, if the  
document is larger than the re-  
cording paper.  
1
2
3
Press:  
To set DISCARD function to After completing this Configura-  
ON, press:  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other settings referring  
to their associated pages for in-  
structions, or press  
*
To change this dimension,  
contact your service repre-  
sentative.  
+
+
+
+
To set DISCARD function to  
OFF, press:  
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
COMPLETED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
DISCARD  
1.ON  
2.OFF  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reverse Order Printing Setting  
This function receives the entire  
Display the  
Select the Desired  
Option  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
facsimile document into memory  
and then prints the document in  
reverse order. In this way, the  
pages of the document will be in  
correct order.  
1
2
3
REVERSE ORDER  
PRINT Menu  
Press:  
To set REVERSE ORDER  
PRINT to ON, Press:  
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other settings referring  
to their associated pages for in-  
structions, or press  
+
+
+
+
To set REVERSE ORDER  
PRINT to OFF, press:  
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
COMPLETED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
REV. ORDER PRINT  
1.ON  
2.OFF  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Privileged Reception  
This function prevents your fac-  
simile from receiving documents  
from unknown parties. Trans-  
missions to the DP80F/DP85F  
are only possible when the  
sending facsimile’s terminal  
identification or telephone num-  
ber match those assigned to the  
Abbreviated Dial Numbers or  
One Touch Dial Keys on your  
facsimile.  
Display the  
PRIVILEGED RX  
Menu  
Select the Privileged  
Reception Option  
1
2
Press:  
To turn ON Privileged Recep-  
tion, press:  
+
+
+
+
To turn OFF Privileged Recep-  
tion, press:  
NOTES:  
• Privileged Reception is ef-  
fective only on incoming  
calls received in the Auto  
Receive Mode.  
• Privileged Reception is not  
available for polling or mail-  
box retrieval requests from  
the remote facsimiles.  
• For this feature to work, you  
must pre-program the num-  
bers of the facsimiles in  
your communication system  
into your DP80F/DP85F’s  
Abbreviated Number or One  
Touch Dial Key database. In  
addition, the remote facsimi-  
le must have the correct  
PRIVILEGED RX  
2.OFF  
COMPLETED  
1.ON  
telephone  
number  
pro-  
grammed as its terminal  
identification.  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RTI (Remote Terminal ID) Print  
To clearly identify the time, date, and page count of your facsimile receptions, the DP80F/DP85F is able  
to print a Reception Footer (RTI) on received documents using the DP80F/DP85F’s internal clock.  
Display the RTI  
Menu  
Select the RTI Print  
Option  
1
2
Select the RTI Print option.  
To print, press:  
Press:  
RECEIVED 05-17-2000  
Date  
10:00  
FROM-+81425887449  
TO-TOSHIBA  
PAGE 001  
+
+
+
+
Transmitting Station  
ID Number  
Footer Message  
To not print, press:  
Receiving Station ID  
Start Time  
Page  
Number  
COMPLETED  
NOTES:  
•
The Transmitting Station ID Number will only be provided if it is programmed in the remote  
facsimile’s Terminal ID.  
•
The Receiving Station ID will only be provided if it is programmed in this facsimile’s Terminal ID.  
RTI  
2.OFF  
1.ON  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Separator Page  
A Separator Page is a sheet automatically inserted between each  
received fax. This feature makes it easier to distinguish between  
individual receptions.  
Select the Facsimile  
Separator Page  
Option  
Display the  
SEPARATOR PAGE  
Menu  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
1
2
3
Press:  
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other settings referring  
to their associated pages for in-  
structions, or press  
To turn ON Facsimile Separator  
Page, press:  
+
+
+
+
B
B
To turn OFF Facsimile Separa-  
tor Page, press:  
A
A
A
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
Separator Page  
RX SEPARATOR  
2.OFF  
COMPLETED  
1.ON  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
Separator Page  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Secure RX Temporary Stop  
This section describes the pro-  
cedure to manually de-activate  
Secure RX.  
Select TEMPORARY  
STOP  
Display the SECURE  
RX Menu  
ENTER the Security  
Code  
1
2
3
This function will permit you to  
temporarily de-activate Secure  
RX to printout documents re-  
tained within memory.  
Press:  
To temporarily de-activate Se-  
cure RX, press:  
Enter the 4-digit security code.  
+
+
NOTE:  
In order to manually de-acti-  
vate Secure RX, you must  
first activate Secure RX.  
(See page 160).  
ENTER SECURITY CODE  
[
]
NOTE:  
ENTER SECURITY CODE  
[****]  
If Secure RX Activation is set  
to OFF, an error will result in  
the operation above. The  
message “SETTING IS OFF”  
will be displayed for 2 sec-  
onds, then the screen re-  
turns to the Standby Mode.  
Then press:  
The following screen is dis-  
played for 2 seconds to confirm  
your selection. Then the display  
returns to the Standby Mode.  
SECURE RX  
1.TEMPORARY STOP  
COMPLETED  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
- ADVANCED PC FUNCTION  
Letter Head Paper Setting  
This function permits you to limit  
usage of a particular paper tray  
to PC printing or copy mode op-  
Display the LETTER  
HEAD PAPER Menu  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
Select the Tray  
Option  
1
3
2
eration. The selected paper tray  
will not be used for facsimile re-  
ceptions.  
Press:  
To turn OFF Letter Head Paper, After completing this Configura-  
press:  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other settings referring  
to their associated pages for in-  
structions, or press  
NOTE:  
This function is only avail-  
able when the Optional Re-  
cording Paper Tray is in-  
stalled.  
“LOWER TRAY” is only dis-  
played when the Optional  
Recording Paper Tray is in-  
stalled to the machine.  
+
+
+
+
To reserve the internal paper  
tray for the Letter head paper  
function, press:  
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
To reserve the optional paper  
tray for the Letter Head Paper  
function, press:  
LETTER HEAD PAPER  
1.OFF  
COMPLETED  
2.UPPER TRAY  
3.LOWER TRAY  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
If the Optional Recording Paper  
Tray is installed, following  
screen is displayed.  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
- TRANSMISSION OPTIONS  
Security Transmission  
This function prevents your fac-  
Load the Document  
Display the  
SECURITY TX Menu  
Select the Option  
Enter the Facsimile  
Number  
simile from sending to an incor-  
rectly dialed phone. With this  
function set ON, the dialed num-  
ber will be checked against the  
remote facsimile’s programmed  
Transmit Terminal ID (TTI). The  
transmission will only occur if  
the number dialed matches the  
remote party’s number.  
1
2
3
4
Press:  
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Turn ON Security Transmission Enter the number of the remote  
by pressing:  
facsimile using any of the fol-  
lowing dialing methods or you  
may designate another option at  
this point.  
+
+
+
+
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
NOTE:  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
To change the default set-  
ting of this function, refer to  
page 150. The status selec-  
tion in this operation will take  
precedence over the default  
setting.  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
SECURITY TX  
2.OFF  
1.ON  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disabling ECM Temporarily  
If the ECM default setting is set  
Select the ECM  
Option  
Display the SET  
ECM Menu  
to ON, it is always effective for  
communications on your fac-  
simile.  
2
1
Press:  
Select “2.OFF” by pressing:  
You can turn the ECM OFF for a  
single transmission using this  
procedure. The facsimile will au-  
tomatically return to its default  
status immediately after that  
transmission is complete.  
+
+
+
+
The following screen is dis-  
played. You may dial the remote  
facsimile for your communica-  
tion job. The display will return  
to the Standby Mode in about  
60 seconds if no keys are  
pressed.  
NOTE:  
If ECM is set to “OFF” in the  
default setting procedure,  
this procedure is not appli-  
cable and the facsimile will  
warn you with an error mes-  
sage,  
“NOT  
ALLOWED  
NOW.”  
ECM  
1.ON  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
2.OFF  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dialing with Sub-Address  
This function attaches a sub-ad-  
Display the SUB  
ADDRESS COMM  
Menu  
Load the Document  
Select the Option  
Enter the SUB  
Address  
dress to the standard destina-  
tion address in the event the re-  
mote party requires one.  
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down Press:  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Select one of the following op- Enter the required SUB address  
Three types of sub-addresses  
can be used (SUB, SEP, and  
PWD); or any combination of  
two or three types can be used.  
After selecting the desired  
types, the transmission to follow  
will be sent to the desired ad-  
dress using the designated sub-  
address.  
tions from the menu.  
(max. 20 digits), then press:  
To select SUB, press:  
+
+
+
+
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
The display returns to the  
screen at the bottom of Step 2.  
You may continue from Step 3  
and enter another sub-address  
of a different type. To complete  
your sub-address entry, select  
option “1.DONE” in Step 3.  
Go to Step 4.  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
To select SEP, press:  
You can activate this option  
while programming an Abbrevi-  
ated Dial Number (page 65) or  
One Touch Dial Key (page 71) if  
communication with a certain re-  
mote party always requires this  
option.  
Go to Step 5.  
To select PWD, press:  
If you activate this option using  
both an Abbreviated Dial Num-  
ber (or One Touch Dial Key)  
setting and using this procedure  
for the same destination, this  
operation will take precedence  
over the pre-programmed set-  
ting in the Abbreviated Dial or  
One Touch Dial.  
SUB ADDRESS COMM.  
1.DONE  
Go to Step 6.  
2.SUBADDRESS SUB  
3.SUBADDRESS SEP  
4.SUBADDRESS PWD  
To complete this procedure,  
press:  
NOTE:  
For more information on  
when to use SUB/SEP/PWD,  
refer to page 69. If you des-  
ignate an erroneous or un-  
necessary sub-address, the  
communication will result in  
an error.  
Go to Step 7.  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dialing with Sub-Address - continued  
Enter the SEP  
Address  
Enter the PWD  
Complete the  
Sub-Address Entry  
Enter the Facsimile  
Number  
5
6
7
8
Enter the required SEP address  
(max. 20 digits), then press:  
When the sub-address data has  
been entered, the following is  
displayed.  
Enter the number of the remote  
facsimile using any of the fol-  
lowing dialing methods or you  
may designate another option at  
this point.  
Enter the required PWD (max.  
20 digits), then press:  
The display returns to the  
screen at the bottom of Step 2.  
You may continue from Step 3  
and enter another sub-address  
of a different type. To complete  
your sub-address entry, select  
option “1.DONE” in step 3.  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
The display returns to the  
screen at the bottom of Step 2.  
You may continue from Step 3  
and enter another sub-address  
of a different type. To complete  
your sub-address entry, select  
option “1.DONE” in Step 3.  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enabling or Disabling Send after Scan Temporarily  
If the Send After Scan Mode  
Load the Document  
Display the SEND  
AFTER SCAN Menu  
Select the Send  
After Scan Option  
Select the Memory  
Full Option  
Default Setting is set to “OFF”,  
this feature allows you enable  
the Send After Scan mode for a  
single transmission. Once that  
transmission is complete, the  
default status is regained.  
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Press:  
Select the desired Send After Select the desired Memory Full  
Scan Option. Option.  
To enable Send After Scan, To cancel the pages that have  
If you enable Send after Scan,  
you will be given the opportunity  
to select “SEND SCANNED  
PAGES” or “CANCEL SEND-  
ING.”  
Select “SEND SCANNED PAG-  
ES” if you want the pages  
scanned to memory (prior to the  
Memory Full) to be transmitted.  
Select “CANCEL SENDING” if  
you want to cancel that trans-  
mission and try again later when  
more memory is available or  
use a Direct TX operation.  
+
+
+
+
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
press:  
been scanned, press:  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
UPON MEMORY FULL  
2.SEND SCANNED PAGES  
To send the pages that have  
been scanned, press:  
1.CANCEL SENDING  
Go to Step 4.  
The following screen is dis-  
played. You may dial the remote  
facsimile for your communica-  
tion job. The display will return  
to the Standby Mode in about  
60 seconds if no keys are  
pressed.  
To disable Send After Scan,  
press:  
SEND AFTER SCAN  
1.ON  
The following is displayed for 2  
seconds.  
2.OFF  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
COMPLETED  
Go to Step 5.  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enabling or Disabling Send after Scan Temporarily  
Enter the Facsimile  
Number  
5
Enter the number of the remote  
facsimile using any of the fol-  
lowing dialing methods.  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
SCANNING DOC. P001  
FILE NUMBER = 110  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Attaching or Printing a Cover Sheet  
This function attaches a cover  
Load the Document  
Display the COVER  
SHEET Menu  
Select the Option  
Enter the Remote  
Party’s Name  
sheet to the document to be  
transmitted or prints the cover  
sheet for confirmation purposes.  
1
2
3
4
Prior to using this cover sheet  
feature, the Cover Sheet func-  
tion must be set to ON. For  
more information see page 151.  
To attach a cover sheet, press:  
Enter the name of the remote  
party.  
Load the document face down Press:  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
See page 36 for more informa-  
tion on Character Entry.  
+
+
+
+
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
NOTES:  
• When sending multi-address  
Then press:  
COVER SHEET  
ENTER TO NAME  
transmissions,  
the  
cover  
sheet will be attached to the  
document for every address.  
• TTI will not be printed on the  
cover sheet.  
Go to Step 4.  
COVER SHEET  
ENTER FROM NAME  
• Smart Batch is not available if  
this function is used.  
To print a cover sheet, press:  
• When re-sending a document  
due to an error, the cover  
sheet is again attached to the  
retransmission.  
When the printing is complete,  
the display return to the  
Standby Mode.  
• In Transmission Reports and  
Journals, the number of  
pages of each transmission  
includes the cover sheet.  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 99%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
COVER SHEET  
1.SEND  
• When a Transmission Report  
is issued with the document  
image output, the first page  
data of the facsimile will be  
printed but not the cover  
page data.  
2.PRINT  
• The cover sheet is always  
sent in Letter size.  
• The resolution for the cover  
sheet is fixed to FINE. How-  
ever, if the receiving unit is  
set to STD, the cover sheet is  
sent in STD.  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Attaching or Printing Cover Sheet - continued  
Enter the Sender’s  
Name  
Enter the Facsimile  
Number  
5
6
Cover Sheet Format  
Enter your name.  
Enter the number of the remote  
facsimile using any of the follow-  
ing dialing methods.  
Your Station ID (if preset; max. 40 characters)  
See page 36 for more informa-  
tion on Character Entry.  
Remote Station ID (printed when preset to the Abbrevi-  
ated Dial Number or One Touch Dial Key used for dial-  
ing). Max. 20 characters  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
Then press:  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
FACSIMILE MESSAGE  
Cover Page Title (fixed)  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
Date this document was  
reserved  
MAY-17-2000  
*** RE-TRANSMISSION ***  
Subtitle printed for  
retransmission only  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 99%  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
TO  
: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST  
Remote Name which was  
entered using this operation  
(ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR )  
Dialed Facsimile Number  
(first 38 digits)  
FAX NUMBER :  
12345678901234567890123456789012345678  
Your Name which was entered  
using this operation  
FROM  
: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
(ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR )  
Your Facsimile Number  
(max. 20 digits)  
FAX NUMBER : 12345678901234567890  
Number of document pages to  
be transmitted  
TOTAL PAGE  
00
PA
- Image Data Area -  
(The image here may be your company logo, etc. It can be preset by  
scanning, using the Cover Sheet Function setting operation on page 151. If  
no image is scanned for this purpose, this area is left blank.)  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Delayed Communication (Time Designation)  
This function is available to re-  
serve a document for transmis-  
sion at a programmed time.  
Display the  
DELAYED COMM.  
Menu  
Load the Document  
Enter the Time and  
Date  
Enter the Facsimile  
Number  
1
2
3
4
This function is convenient for  
Load the document face down  
making use of non-peak dis-  
Press:  
Enter the time and day-of-  
month to start the communica-  
tion.  
Enter the number of the remote  
facsimile using any of the fol-  
lowing dialing methods.  
in the Document Support (see  
count telephone rates for do-  
mestic and overseas facsimile  
page 82).  
transmissions. Delayed com-  
+
+
+
+
Adjust the resolution and con-  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
munication can be applied to  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
Single Transmissions (to trans-  
and 84).  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
mit a single document to a  
specified destination), Multi-ad-  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
dress (Group) Transmissions,  
Mail Box Transmissions, Relay  
Transmissions, and Polling  
Communications.  
AUTO RECEIVE  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
You can activate this option  
while programming an Abbrevi-  
ated Dial Number (page 65) or  
One Touch Dial key setting  
(page 71) if communication  
with the remote party always  
requires this option. Otherwise,  
use the following procedure.  
(The cursor moves to the next  
right digit as a numeric value is  
entered on each digit. Use the  
NOTE:  
If the day-of-month value en-  
tered in Step 2 does not ex-  
ist in the current month, the  
communication will start on  
the first day of the next  
month. For example, if “30”  
is entered in February, the  
communication will start on  
March 1st.  
key to backspace and de-  
lete the values of digits already  
entered.)  
DELAYED COMM.  
[HH:MMAM DD]  
Change the AM/PM designation  
by pressing the following keys.  
NOTE:  
or  
It is not necessary to input a  
day-of-month, if you wish the  
communication to be com-  
pleted within the next 24-  
hour period.  
When the correct time and date  
is entered, press:  
Simply leave the day-of-  
month area blank.  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Priority Transmission  
Priority Transmission permits  
you to execute a transmission  
before any other reserved trans-  
mission job.  
Load the Document  
Display the  
PRIORITY TX Menu  
Enter the Facsimile  
Number  
1
2
3
Load the document face down Press:  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Enter the number of the remote  
facsimile using any of the fol-  
lowing dialing methods.  
NOTES:  
•
Priority reservation is good  
for a Single Transmission  
only.  
+
+
+
+
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
•
Only one communication can  
be reserved as a Priority  
Transmission.  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
When a transmission is al-  
ready reserved as a Priority  
Transmission, an error tone  
and “NOT ALLOWED NOW”  
LCD prompt result when Pri-  
ority Transmission is se-  
lected.  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
PRIORITY FAX  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
SCANNING DOC. P001  
FILE NUMBER = 110  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending Recovery Transmission  
This operation is used to re-send  
Display the  
Select the Desired  
Job  
Change the  
Facsimile Number  
Cancel the  
Document  
a document after the document  
initially failed to be sent. If recov-  
ery transmission is set to ON,  
the document is stored in the  
DP80F/DP85F for resending.  
1
2
3
4
RECOVERY  
TRANSMIT Menu  
Press:  
When the sending document to Enter the new facsimile number.  
be recovered was sent using the  
Press:  
One Touch key, Abbreviated  
Dial Number, Group Number, or  
Alphabet Dialing, press:  
NOTE:  
+
+
+
+
When the Recovery Trans-  
mission is set to OFF, an er-  
ror tone and “NOT AL-  
LOWED NOW” LCD prompt  
result when Recovery Trans-  
mission is selected.  
If there is no document  
stored for recovery transmis-  
sion, an error tone sounds  
and “NO ENTRY” LCD  
prompt will be displayed.  
DELETE JOB NUMBER005  
1.YES  
2.NO  
You can also change the num-  
ber of the remote facsimile if di-  
aled from the Dial Keypad.  
To re-transmit the document or If the correct number is entered,  
change the facsimile number, press:  
press  
.
The transmission starts immedi-  
ately if the phone line is avail-  
able.  
JOB NUMBER  
1.START  
005  
2.CHANGE  
Press  
or  
to  
To start the transmission, press:  
To change the number, press:  
view the jobs stored for resend-  
ing. The information is dis-  
played on the LCD display.  
RECOVERY TX  
[ENTER]:START  
FILE NBR =  
12345  
005  
FAX NUMBER (MAX128)  
[12345  
]
To cancel the document, go to  
Step 4.  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending Recovery Transmission - continued  
Select the Cancel  
Option  
5
To delete the selected docu-  
ment stored for resending,  
press:  
To retain the selected docu-  
ment stored for resending,  
press:  
DELETED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Standby Mode screen.  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Low Speed Transmission  
If communication errors fre-  
quently occur while transmitting  
Load the Document  
Display the FAX  
SPEED Menu  
Select a Speed  
Enter the Facsimile  
Number  
1
2
3
4
documents due to bad line con-  
ditions, we recommend you se-  
lect a lower transmission speed  
to enable quality transmissions.  
The transmission speed will be  
restored to the default value au-  
tomatically after the low speed  
transmission is completed.  
Select the desired speed.  
Load the document face down Press:  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Enter the number of the remote  
facsimile using any of the fol-  
lowing dialing methods or you  
may designate another option at  
this point.  
To select FASTEST POSSIBLE,  
press:  
+
+
+
+
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
You can activate this option  
while programming an Abbrevi-  
ated Dial Number (page 65) or  
One Touch Dial Key (page 71) if  
communication with a certain  
remote party always requires  
this option.  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
To select 14400 BPS, press:  
To select 9600 BPS, press:  
To select 4800 BPS, press:  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
FAX SPEED  
1.FASTEST POSSIBLE  
2.14400BPS  
3.9600BPS  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
4.4800BPS  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Line Monitor  
This function is used to set the  
facsimile’s speaker ON in order  
to monitor the phone line for one  
communication only. This func-  
tion is mainly used to confirm di-  
aling and phone line status.  
Load the Document  
Display the LINE  
MONITOR Menu  
Select the Option  
Enter the Facsimile  
Number  
1
2
3
4
Press:  
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Turn ON the monitor speaker by  
pressing:  
Enter the number of the remote  
facsimile using any of the fol-  
lowing dialing methods or you  
may designate another option at  
this point.  
You can activate this option  
when programming an Abbrevi-  
ated Dial Number (page 65) or  
One Touch Dial Key (page 71) if  
communication with a certain re-  
mote party always requires this  
option.  
+
+
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
LINE MONITOR  
2.OFF  
1.ON  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Page Count  
When this function is set to ON,  
the designated number of pages  
Load the Document  
Display the PAGE  
NUMBER Menu  
Enter the Number of  
Document Pages  
Enter the Facsimile  
Number  
1
2
3
4
will be printed at the top of the  
recording paper at the remote  
station. This function is effective  
for a Direct Document Transmis-  
sion only. (The total number of  
pages will be printed automati-  
cally as part of the TTI in Memo-  
ry Transmissions.)  
Press:  
Enter the number of document  
pages (1 to 999).  
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Enter the number of the remote  
facsimile using any of the fol-  
lowing dialing methods or you  
may designate another option at  
this point.  
+
+
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
This setting is very helpful for  
confirming that all of the pages  
loaded into the feeder have  
been successfully sent.  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 90  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 91  
It will also assist the recipient to  
track the number of pages as it  
will add a page count to a the  
TTI at the top of your transmit-  
ted pages (i.e., 1/5, 2/5, 3/5,  
etc.).  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
PAGE NUMBER  
(1-999)  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
The press:  
[ ]  
The facsimile will compare the  
number of pages actually sent  
with the number you entered.  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communication Report Print  
You can request a communica-  
Load the Document  
Display the TX  
REPORT Menu  
Select the Option  
Enter the Facsimile  
Number  
tion report every time a docu-  
ment is sent. If you desire a  
communication report every  
time you send a document, set  
this function to ON as a default  
(see page 187).  
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Select the function key on the To set the DP80F/DP85F to al- Enter the number of the remote  
Operation Panel.  
ways print a communication re- facsimile using any of the fol-  
port, press:  
lowing dialing methods.  
Press:  
If you plan to use communica-  
tion reports only occasionally,  
use this procedure. The TX Re-  
port key allows you to obtain a  
report for one communication  
only.  
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
To set the DP80F/DP85F to  
only print a communication re-  
port when an error condition is  
encountered, press:  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
TX REPORT  
1.ALWAYS  
You can activate this option  
while programming an Abbrevi-  
ated Dial Number (see page 65)  
or One Touch Dial Key setting  
(see page 71) if communication  
with a specific remote party al-  
ways requires this option.  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
2.ON ERROR  
3.OFF  
To set the DP80F/DP85F to  
never print a communication re-  
port, press:  
MAY-17 09:43 AM 80%  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LISTS AND REPORTS - LIST AND REPORT OPTIONS SETTING  
This facsimile allows the operator to set various options regarding  
the lists and reports listed below.  
Reception Journal Settings  
Display the  
JOURNAL Menu  
Select the JOURNAL  
Option  
SET KEY DEFAULT  
Options  
1
2
3
JOURNAL  
There are two types of Journals available on the DP80F/DP85F.  
Both the Transmission Journal (TX Journal) and Reception Journal  
(RX Journal) list the 40 most recent transactions. Journals can be  
printed either Automatically or Manually. When manually printed,  
Press:  
To configure the type of Journal  
Select the desired option.  
to print when  
press:  
is used,  
To print both TX and RX Jour-  
must be pressed. To select the type of Journal to print when  
nals when  
is used, press:  
+
+
+
+
is pressed, complete manual Journal printing discussed in this  
section.  
+
SET KEY DEFAULT  
1.SEND & RECEIVE  
To print only a TX Journal when  
is used, press:  
COMMUNICATION REPORT  
Communication Report allows you to print a report after every trans-  
mission. Reports can be printed automatically or manually. When  
printing automatically, you can designate to print a report for every  
transmission or only when an error has occurred during the trans-  
mission.  
In addition, Communication Report allows you to further select the  
option of printing the first page image of the fax document on the  
report to facilitate identification.  
2.SEND  
3.RECEIVE  
Go to Step 3.  
To print only a RX Journal when  
is used, press:  
To set automatic printing, press:  
+
To setup the Communication Report, go to page 189 to 193.  
JOURNAL  
01.SET KEY DEFAULT  
RECEPTION LIST  
The DP80F/DP85F will print a reception list under the following con-  
ditions:  
The following screen is dis-  
played to confirm your selection.  
02.AUTO PRINT  
AUTO PRINT  
1.ON  
•
Reservation to Local Mailbox  
When reserving a document to a Mailbox within the DP80F/  
DP85F locally, a reception list is printed.  
2.OFF  
COMPLETED  
Go to Step 4.  
•
Remote Mailbox  
When reserving a document to a Mailbox within the DP80F/  
DP85F remotely from another facsimile, a reception list is printed  
on the DP80F/DP85F.  
Press  
to complete this  
setting.  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reception Journal Settings - continued  
AUTO PRINT  
Options  
4
Press the following key to setup  
automatic printing of the TX and  
RX Journals whenever 40 trans-  
actions have taken in place.  
To turn ON Automatic printing of  
journal, press:  
To turn OFF Automatic printing  
of journal, press:  
The following screen is dis-  
played to confirm your selection.  
COMPLETED  
Press  
to complete this  
setting.  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Direct Transmission Report Setting  
Display the TX  
REPORT Menu  
Select the Option for  
TX REPORT  
1
2
Select the desired printing op-  
tion for non-memory, direct  
transmissions.  
Press:  
+
+
+
+
+
+
To ALWAYS print a Transmis-  
sion Report whenever a docu-  
ment is transmitted, press:  
To only print a Transmission  
Report when an error occurrs,  
press:  
To turn OFF automatic printing  
of Transmission Reports, press:  
The following screen is dis-  
played to confirm your selection.  
TX REPORT  
1.ALWAYS  
COMPLETED  
2.ON ERROR  
3.OFF  
Press  
to complete this  
setting.  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory Transmission Report Setting  
Display the  
MEMORY TX  
Menu  
Select the Option for  
MEMORY TX  
Set the Option for  
SHOW FIRST PAGE  
1
2
3
Press:  
Select the desired printing op-  
tion for single location memory  
transmissions.  
To print a first page image of the  
document on the Transmission  
Report, press:  
+
+
+
+
+
+
To ALWAYS print a Transmis-  
sion Report whenever a docu-  
ment is transmitted, press:  
To not print a first page image of  
the document on the Transmis-  
sion Report, press:  
To only print a Transmission  
Report when an error occurrs,  
press:  
The following screen is dis-  
played to confirm your selection.  
SHOW FIRST PAGE  
2.OFF  
COMPLETED  
1.ON  
Press  
to complete this  
To turn OFF automatic printing  
of Transmission Reports, press:  
setting.  
The following screen is dis-  
played to confirm your selection.  
MEMORY TX  
1.ALWAYS  
2.ON ERROR  
3.OFF  
COMPLETED  
Press  
to complete this  
setting.  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multi-Address Report Setting  
Display the  
Select the Option for MULTI-ADD REPORT  
Set the Option for  
SHOW FIRST PAGE  
1
2
3
MULTI-ADD  
REPORT Menu  
Press:  
Select the desired option for To turn off automatic printing of To print a first page image of the  
Multi-address Transmission Re- Transmission Reports, press:  
ports.  
document on the transmission  
report, press:  
+
+
+
+
+
+
To ALWAYS print a Transmis-  
sion Report whenever a docu-  
ment is transmitted, press:  
The following screen is dis-  
played to confirm your selection.  
To not print a first page image of  
the document on the transmis-  
sion report, press:  
COMPLETED  
To only print a Transmission Re-  
port when an error occurs,  
press:  
The following screen is dis-  
played to confirm your selection.  
Press  
to complete this  
setting.  
COMPLETED  
SHOW FIRST PAGE  
1.ON  
2.OFF  
Press  
to complete this  
setting.  
Go to next step.  
MULTI-ADD REPORT  
1.ALWAYS  
2.ON ERROR  
3.OFF  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multi-Polling Report Setting  
Display the  
MULTI POLL  
REPORT Options  
1
2
MULTI POLL  
REPORT Menu  
Press:  
Select the desired option for  
Multi-polling Reports.  
To ALWAYS print  
whenever a polling operation  
occurs, press:  
a
report  
+
+
+
+
+
+
To only print a report when an  
error occurrs, press:  
To turn OFF automatic printing  
of this report, press:  
The following screen is dis-  
played to confirm your selection.  
MULTIPOLL REPORT  
1.ALWAYS  
COMPLETED  
2.ON ERROR  
3.OFF  
Press  
to complete this  
setting.  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Relay Originator Report Setting  
Display the RELAY  
ORIGINATOR Menu  
Select the Option for RELAY ORIGINATOR  
Set the Option for  
SHOW FIRST PAGE  
1
2
3
Press:  
Select the desired option to print  
a report whenever a Relay trans-  
mission is sent.  
To print a first page image of the  
document on the transmission  
report, press:  
To turn OFF Automatic printing  
of reports, press:  
+
+
+
+
+
+
NOTE:  
The following screen is dis-  
played to confirm your selection.  
This is only applicable if the  
DP80F/DP85F is used as an  
Originator for a relay trans-  
mission (see page 116).  
To not print a first page image of  
the document on the transmis-  
sion report, press:  
COMPLETED  
To ALWAYS print a report when-  
ever a document is transmitted,  
press:  
Press  
to complete this  
The following screen is dis-  
played to confirm your selection.  
setting.  
To only print a report when an  
error occurs, press:  
COMPLETED  
SHOW FIRST PAGE  
1.ON  
Press  
to complete this  
setting.  
2.OFF  
RELAY ORIGINATOR  
1.ALWAYS  
Go to next step.  
2.ON ERROR  
3.OFF  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reception List Settings  
Display the  
RECEPTION LIST  
Menu  
Select the Job for  
RECEPTION LIST  
LOCAL MAILBOX  
LIST  
REMOTE MAILBOX  
LIST  
1
2
3
4
Press:  
Select the desired option.  
When “01.LOCAL MAILBOX” is When “02.REMOTE MAILBOX”  
selected in Step 2, the following is selected in Step 2, the follow-  
To select the LOCAL MAIL-  
BOX, press:  
screen displays.  
ing screen displays.  
+
+
+
+
LOCAL MAILBOX  
2.OFF  
REMOTE MAILBOX  
2.OFF  
+
1.ON  
1.ON  
Go to Step 3.  
To turn ON, press:  
To turn ON, press:  
To select the REMOTE MAIL-  
BOX, press:  
+
To turn OFF, press:  
To turn OFF, press:  
Go to Step 4.  
RECEPTION LIST  
01.LOCAL MAILBOX  
The following screen is dis- The following screen is dis-  
played to confirm your selection.  
played to confirm your selection.  
02.REMOTE MAILBOX  
COMPLETED  
COMPLETED  
Press  
to complete this Press  
to complete this  
setting.  
setting.  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
- LIST AND REPORT PRINT FORMAT AND PRINTING PROCEDURE  
Transmission/Reception Journal (Communication Journal)  
Transmission/Reception Journal  
shows the result of each com-  
munication for up to the past 40  
transmissions/receptions.  
“TO” is replaced with “FROM”  
Facsimile/Telephone Number  
in a RECEPTION JOURNAL  
of this facsimile unit  
Time of output of this  
Machine Counter  
list or report  
List/Report Name  
Information  
Printing Procedure  
TRANSMISSION JOURNAL  
Your Station’s  
ID Name  
Auto Print (available if pro-  
grammed; see page 187):  
TIME  
: MAY-17-00 14:25  
TEL NUMBER :12345678901234567890  
NAME  
:ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
SCAN COUNT :1234 (000004D2)  
PRINT COUNT:2345 (00000929)  
DRUM COUNT :3456 (00000D80)  
Printing will automatically  
start whenever 40 transmis-  
sions (or 40 receptions) are  
completed.  
NBR. FILE NBR  
001 020  
DATE  
TIME  
DURATION PGS  
TO  
+1234567890  
DEPT NBR  
01  
ACCOUNT MODE  
9999 G3 502 P  
STATUS  
NG 20  
Manual Print (always available)  
MAY-17 14:01  
59/59  
099  
Press:  
Date and Time the  
communication  
started  
VERY IMPORTANT:  
Up to date Activity Journals  
must be maintained by the  
user. In the event an elec-  
tronic circuit board must be  
replaced in this unit, informa-  
tion pertaining to Scan, Print,  
and Drum counters must be  
entered into the replacement  
electronic circuit board. This  
information is listed at the  
top of every journal.  
Remote Station’s  
Account No.  
Serial No.  
Error Code  
Fax/Telephone Num-  
ber (“ ” an alternate  
number or sub-ad-  
dress dial was used.)  
(printed only when the  
Account Number op-  
tion is ON and used)  
(lists the trans-  
missions in the  
order they took  
place)  
Result:  
OK (successful)  
NG (failure)  
Length of each  
transaction:  
Minutes/Seconds  
P
= Polling  
SR, R = Relay Communication  
SB = Mailbox Communication  
Communication Mode  
G3 = G3  
EC = ECM  
EX  
Number of Pages  
1st  
2nd  
3rd  
(bps) (Resolution) (Mode)  
Department No.  
= ECM with shortened  
protocol  
File No.  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
2400  
4800  
7200  
9600  
12000 16x15.4  
14400  
8x3.85  
8x7.7  
8x15.4  
-
MH  
MR  
MMR  
JBIG  
(indicates the depart-  
ment responsible for  
this transmission job;  
printed only when the  
Department Control  
option is ON)  
(assigned to all com-  
munication jobs at the  
time of scanning)  
HW, HR= RDC communication  
(“ ” is 2nd line communication)  
V.34  
300dpi  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transmission Report  
This is the result report printed  
after a Direct Transmission (a  
job transmitted directly from the  
document feeder instead of  
from memory).  
TRANSMISSION REPORT  
Printing Procedure  
TIME  
TEL NUMBER:12345678901234567890  
NAME :ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
:MAY-17-00 14:25  
Auto Print (if programmed, see  
page 189):  
Printing will automatically  
start after a transmission is  
completed.  
NBR. FILE NBR DATE  
TIME  
DURATION PGS  
00/58 002  
TO  
REDFIELD H.S.  
DEPT NBR ACOUNT  
MODE  
STATUS  
NG 20  
001 020 MAY-17 14:01  
G3 512  
The print format is the same as that for the Transmission Journal on the preceding page except that the record of the  
only last transmission job is issued in a Transmission Report.  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory Transmission Report  
This is the result report printed  
after a Memory Transmission.  
(A job transmitted after the  
document is first scanned into  
memory.)  
MEMORY TRANSMISSION REPORT  
TIME  
TEL NUMBER:12345678901234567890  
NAME :ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
:MAY-17-00 14:25  
Printing Procedure  
Auto Print (if programmed, see  
page 190):  
FILE NUMBER  
DATE  
: 070  
Printing will automatically  
start after a transmission is  
completed.  
: MAY-17 14:18  
: REDFIELD H.S.  
: 002  
TO  
DOCUMENT PAGES  
START TIME  
END TIME  
SENT PAGES  
STATUS  
: MAY-17 14:20  
: MAY-17 14:23  
: 002  
: OK  
File Number of the transmission job  
Date and time when the job is accepted  
Remote Party’s Name or Facsimile/Tele-  
phone Number  
Number of pages input to memory  
Time when the transmission started  
Time when the transmission ended (the  
time when a Recovery Transmission is  
designated)  
Number of pages transmitted normally  
Transmission result  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reservation List  
This is a listing of the communi-  
cation jobs now reserved in  
memory.  
RESERVATION LIST  
Printing Procedure  
TIME  
:MAY-17-00 14:25  
TEL NUMBER:12345678901234567890  
NAME  
:ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
Manual Print  
Press:  
TX/RX  
FILE NBR FUNCTION  
PGS MAIL DATE  
TIME  
TO  
001  
MULTI TX  
003  
MAY-16 11:55 TEL NBR:123456789012345678901234567890  
1234567890  
ABB.NBR:001 002 003 004 005 006 007  
GROUP :0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006  
MAY-16 22:50 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST  
OT NBR :01  
+
+
005  
009  
010  
POLLING RX  
RELAY STATION  
MULTIPOLLING  
001  
MAY-16 22:25 GROUP :1001 1002 1999  
POLLING/FAX MAILBOX FILE NBR FUNCTION  
961 POLLING  
PGS MAIL DATE  
TIME  
TO  
099 MAY-13 17:30  
RECOVERY TX  
FILE NBR FUNCTION  
PGS MAIL DATE  
TIME  
TO  
970 SINGLE TX 003  
MAY-15 14:20 123-4567  
Box Number  
(in case of Mail Box  
communication)  
Destination  
(Name or Dial Number of the  
Remote Party)  
Type of  
communication  
File Number of the  
communication  
Designated Time, or  
Time of Reception  
Number of Pages  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multi-Address Transmission Report  
This is the result report printed  
after a Multi-address Transmis-  
sion.  
MULTI TRANSMISSION REPORT  
TIME  
TEL NUMBER :  
NAME  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
:MAY-17-00 14:25  
Printing Procedure  
12345678901234567890  
:
Auto Print (if programmed; see  
page 191):  
FILE NUMBER  
DATE  
: 005  
: MAY-17 14:18  
: 015  
Printing will automatically  
start after all transmissions  
in the operation have been  
completed successfully or  
unsuccessfully.  
DOCUMENT PAGES  
START TIME  
END TIME  
: MAY-17 10:56  
: MAY-17 14:18(RECOVERY TIME:MAY-17 14:18)  
SUCCESSFUL  
GROUP NUMBER  
0001  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST  
ABB. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008  
009 010  
OT  
02  
05  
ONE TOUCH NUMBER  
01  
TSRQRPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA  
12345678901234567890  
TEL NUMBER  
UNSUCCESSFUL  
SENT PAGES  
GROUP NUMBER  
0002  
AABBCCDDEEFFGGHHIIJJ  
0T  
33  
AAABBBCCCDDDEEEFFFGG  
01  
Receiver where an error occurred  
SENT PAGES ... Number of pages sent normally  
Receiver where the transmission was completed normally  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multi-Polling Report  
This is the result report printed  
after a Multi-polling Reception.  
MULTI POLLING REPORT  
Printing Procedure  
TIME  
TEL NUMBER :  
NAME  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
:MAY-17-00 14:25  
12345678901234567890  
:
Auto Print (if programmed, see  
page 192):  
FILE NUMBER  
DATE  
:
:
:
:
005  
Printing will automatically  
start after all polling opera-  
tions have been completed  
successfully or unsuccess-  
fully.  
MAY-17 14:18  
MAY-17 10:56  
MAY-17 14:18  
START TIME  
END TIME  
SUCCESSFUL  
GROUP NUMBER  
0001  
(RECOVERY TIME:MAY-17 14:18)  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST  
ABB. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008  
009 010  
OT  
02 05  
ABB. NUMBER  
014  
HONG KONG OFFICE  
TEL NUMBER  
1234567890123456789  
UNSUCCESSFUL  
PAGES  
SENT  
GROUP NUMBER  
0002  
AABBCCDDEEFFGGHHIIJJ  
0T  
33 AAABBBCCCDDDEEEFFFGG  
01  
Receiver where an error occurred  
SENT PAGES ... Number of pages sent normally  
Receiver where the transmission was completed normally  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Relay Send Originator Report  
This is the result report the  
Originating Terminal prints after  
a Relay Transmission.  
RELAY SEND ORIGINATOR TERMINAL REPORT  
TIME  
TEL NUMBER:12345678901234567890  
NAME :ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
:MAY-17-00 14:25  
Printing Procedure  
Auto Print (if programmed, see  
page 193):  
FILE NUMBER  
DATE  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
009  
MAY-17 10:55  
Printing will automatically  
start after the originating sta-  
tion transmits to all of the  
assigned relay stations, suc-  
cessfully or unsuccessfully.  
TO  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST  
Relay box  
DOCUMENT PAGES  
START TIME  
END TIME  
SENT PAGES  
STATUS  
1
015  
MAY-17 10:56  
MAY-17 14:18  
(RECOVERY TIME:MAY-17 14:10)  
015  
OK  
FILE NUMBER  
010  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mailbox (ITU-T Compatible F-code Communication) List  
Issues a list of the documents  
reserved through the local (i.e.,  
your own) station and remote  
stations, using the Open Mail-  
box System (ITU-T Compatible  
F-code Communication).  
MAILBOX (OPEN) LIST  
TIME  
:MAY-17-00 14:25  
TEL NUMBER :12345678901234567890  
NAME  
:ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
Printing Procedure  
Press:  
BOX NBR  
TYPE  
CONFIDENTIAL BOX  
PGS FILE NBR DATE  
TIME  
FROM  
12345678901234567890  
*123##456*  
025  
001  
012  
099  
033  
001  
099  
111  
198  
173  
MAY-15 22:30 12345678901234567890  
MAY-16 08:17 REMOTE  
MAY-16 11:50 +811234567  
MAY-16 19:37 LOCAL  
+
+
CONFIDENTIAL BOX  
###999***  
BULLETIN BOARD  
MAY-17 07:43 LOCAL  
Box No.  
Mailbox Type  
File No.  
Number of Document  
pages entered  
Date and Time the  
Document was entered  
Document Originator ID  
LOCAL .................. Your Own Station  
Other indication ....Remote station’s ID  
Name or Dial Number  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Department Control List  
Available only when the Department Control Mode option is selected.  
Issues a list of Department  
Codes and data processed for  
the Department Control Mode.  
Printing Procedure  
DEPARTMENT CODE LIST  
TIME  
:MAY-17-00 14:25  
Press:  
TEL NUMBER :12345678901234567890  
NAME  
:ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
+
+
DEPT NBR  
NAME  
DEPT CODE  
TX PGS  
RX PGS  
COPY PGS  
01  
02  
14  
15  
20  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST  
OPERATION CENTER  
SYSTEM DESIGN  
XYZ  
12345  
82615  
12131  
33151  
99990  
123456  
296541  
88888  
6543  
1
123456  
12104  
88887  
12109  
4
123456  
99999  
988886  
450  
7
Department  
Name  
Department Code  
for operating the  
department  
Department  
No.  
Sent  
Received  
Copied  
Accumulated number of pages  
operated by the department  
NOTE:  
The list shown is produced when the Master code (01) is used to initiate the print list operation. If a  
user code (02-50) is used, only the data relating to that department will be printed.  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preset Dialing Number Lists  
These are listings of the preset  
Abbreviated Dial Numbers, One  
Touch Keys, Multi-address  
Groups, and Alphabetical sort.  
You can request all of these  
lists (except Address Book List)  
as part of one operation se-  
quence or individually one by  
one.  
All of Lists  
The following will be printed. For the print format and description of  
printed items, see the page listed below:  
Issues three lists, one after an-  
other, in one operation se-  
quence.  
• Abbreviated Dial Number List  
• One Touch Number List  
• Group Number List  
(page 205)  
(page 206)  
(page 207)  
Printing Procedure  
Press:  
+
+
+
+
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preset Dialing Number Lists - continued  
Abbreviated Dial Number List  
Issues a list of remote station  
dialing numbers assigned as  
Abbreviated Dial Numbers.  
ABBREVIATED TEL NUMBER LIST  
Printing Procedure  
TIME  
TEL NUMBER:12345678901234567890  
NAME :ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
:MAY-17-00 14:25  
Press:  
ABB.NBRNAME  
TEL NUMBER  
TIME MONI. BPS REPORT  
+
+
+
+
001  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST  
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890  
ON  
23:45 ON  
144  
1234567  
0987654321  
SUB:12345678901234567890  
SEP:112233445566  
PWD:********************  
109  
900  
GREENVILLE OFFICE  
999999999  
333-912345678  
09:30 OFF  
96  
OFF  
Station  
Name  
Station Dial Number:  
... Alternate Dial Number  
Abbreviated  
Dial Number  
SUB, SEP, or PWD  
... Type of Sub-address  
Designated Time  
Line Monitoring  
Communication Speed  
Limit (x 100)  
TX Report Issue/Non-issue  
Status  
Attached Fax Option Status (if any)  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preset Dialing Number Lists - continued  
One Touch Number List  
Issues a list of dial numbers of  
the remote stations assigned to  
One Touch Dial Keys.  
ONE TOUCH NUMBER INFORMATION  
Printing Procedure  
TIME  
:MAY-17-00 14:25  
TEL NUMBER :12345678901234567890  
NAME :ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
Press:  
OT NBR NAME/FUNCTION  
ABB. FAX NUMBER  
TIME MONI. BPS REPORT  
23:45 ON 144  
01  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST1234567890123456789012345678901234567890  
ON  
+
1234567  
0987654321  
SUB:12345678901234567890  
SEP:112233445566  
PWD:********************  
+
+
+
09  
22  
35  
ABB.NBR  
GROUP NBR  
REDFIELD HS  
170  
0123  
9-1-605-1234567  
23:40  
One Touch  
Key Number  
Station Name, or  
use of the key  
Designated Time  
Line Monitoring  
Communication Speed  
Limit (x 100)  
Abbreviated Dial Number,  
Group Number, or actual  
Dial Number  
TX Report Issue/Non-issue  
Status  
... Alternate Dial Number  
SUB, SEP, or PWD  
Attached Facsimile Option Status (if any)  
... Type of Sub-address  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preset Dialing Number Lists - continued  
Group Number List  
Issues a list of One Touch Key  
or Abbreviated Dial Numbers  
registered  
in  
Multi-address  
Groups or Multi-polling Groups.  
GROUP NUMBER INFORMATION  
TIME  
:MAY-17-00 14:25  
TEL NUMBER:12345678901234567890  
NAME  
:ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
Printing Procedure  
Press:  
GROUP NUMBER NAME  
OT/ABB. NUMBER  
0001  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST  
OT  
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15  
16 17 18 19 20  
001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015  
016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030  
031 032 033 034 999  
100 200 300 400 500  
31 32 33  
+
+
+
+
ABB.  
1111  
1999  
ABBCCCDDDDEEEEE  
ZZZZZ  
ABB.  
OT  
ABB.  
995 996 997 998 999  
Group Number  
One Touch Key Numbers and Abbreviated Dial  
Numbers belonging to the Group:  
OT .... One Touch Key Numbers  
ABB. .... Abbreviated Dial Numbers  
Group Name  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preset Dialing Number Lists - continued  
Address Book List  
Issues a listing of names pro-  
grammed to Abbreviated Dial  
Number, One Touch Key, and  
Group Number.  
ADDRESS BOOK  
TIME  
:MAY-17-00 14:25  
TEL NUMBER :12345678901234567890  
NAME  
:ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
Printing Procedure  
Press:  
NAME  
LOCATION  
OT 01  
ABB./OT/GROUP/TEL NUMBER  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST  
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890  
0987654321  
SUB:09876543210987654321  
SEP:998877665544  
PWD:********************  
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890  
1234567  
+
+
+
+
BCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST  
ABB. 001  
Chicago Group  
GREENVILLE OFFICE  
NEW YORK OFFICE  
GROUP 0001  
ABB. 109  
ABB. 900  
999999999  
333-912345678  
Names of Abbreviated  
Dial Number, One  
Touch Key or Group  
Number  
Station Dial Number/E-Mail Address  
....... Alternate Dial Number  
SUB, SEP, or PWD  
.......... Type of Sub-address  
OT ............ One Touch Key Numbers  
ABB. ......... Abbreviated Dial Numbers  
Group ....... Group Number  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function List  
Issues a list to confirm the func-  
tions currently set in this fac-  
simile unit.  
FUNCTION LIST  
TIME  
TEL NUMBER:12345678901234567890  
NAME :ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
:MAY-17-00 14:25  
Printing Procedure  
RX SETTING  
SECURE RX  
MACHINE SETTINGS  
AUTO RECEIVE MODE  
RING DELAY  
DIAL TYPE  
:OFF  
:ON  
:ON  
:AUTO  
: 2  
:MF  
MEMORY RX  
RX REDUCTION  
DISCARD  
REVERSE ORDER PRINT  
PRIVILEGED RX  
RTI  
Press:  
:ON  
CALL NUMBER  
REDIAL MODE INTERVAL  
REDIAL MODE COUNTER  
EXCHANGE TYPE  
RINGER VOLUME  
ALARM VOLUME  
KEY TOUCH VOLUME  
MONITOR VOLUME  
SUPER POWER SAVER  
PRINTER POWER SAVER  
START TIME  
:
:OFF  
:OFF  
:OFF  
:OFF  
: 1MIN  
: 5  
:PSTN  
:3  
:3  
:3  
:3  
:MANUAL  
:ON  
:04:00PM  
:09:00AM  
:OFF  
:OFF  
: 3MIN  
:ON  
:OFF  
:OFF  
:US  
+
RX SEPARATOR  
LISTS  
JOURNAL  
MANUAL  
+
:TX & RX  
:ON  
:ON  
AUTO  
ERROR CODE  
COMMUNICATION REPORT  
END TIME  
DOCUMENT FEEDER TX :ALWAYS  
MEMORY TX  
MULTI ADDRESS TX  
ACCOUNT CODE  
LINE MONITOR  
RECEIVE INTERVAL  
ECM  
SORT COPY  
COPY REDUCTION  
COUNTRY  
:ALWAYS(IMAGE)  
:ALWAYS(IMAGE)  
MULTI ADDRESS POLL :ALWAYS  
RELAY ORIGINATOR :ALWAYS(IMAGE)  
RECEPTION LIST  
LOCAL MAILBOX  
REMOTE MAILBOX  
:OFF  
:ON  
LANGUAGE  
:ENGLISH  
REMOTE SERVICE  
SCANNER & PRINTER  
DOCUMENT MODE  
RESOLUTION  
REMOTE ACCESS  
DOWNLOAD  
:ALWAYS OFF  
:NO JOB IN MEMORY  
:
:STD  
RDC PASSWORD  
CONTRAST  
DOCUMENT LENGTH  
PAPER SIZE  
:NORMAL  
:1m  
TOTAL PAGE  
SCAN  
PRINT  
DRUM COUNT  
:237  
:273  
:3017  
TRAY 1  
TRAY 2  
LETTER HEAD PAPER  
:LETTER  
:LETTER  
:OFF  
MEMORY SIZE  
ROM VERSION  
:1.5MB  
TX SETTING  
MEMORY TX  
:
:
:
:ON  
SECURITY TX  
COVER SHEET  
RECOVERY TX  
TTI  
:OFF  
:OFF  
:OFF  
:INSIDE  
:OFF  
SEND AFTER SCAN  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu List  
Issues a list of menu items  
through which functions or op-  
tions can be set.  
MENU LIST  
TIME  
TEL NUMBER:12345678901234567890  
NAME :ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
:MAY-17-00 14:25  
This list can be a useful guide  
during machine programming.  
1.FAX FEATURES  
1.SEND OPTION  
01.SECURITY TX  
5.DEFAULT SETTINGS  
1.MACHINE SETTINGS  
01.SPEAKER VOLUME  
01.RINGER VOLUME  
Printing Procedure  
02.ECM  
03.SUB ADDRESS COMM.  
04.SEND AFTER SCAN  
05.COVER SHEET  
06.DELAYED COMM.  
07.PRIORITY  
02.ALARM VOLUME  
03.KEY TOUCH VOLUME  
04.MONITOR VOLUME  
Press:  
02.POWER SAVER  
01.SUPER P.S.  
08.RECOVERY TX  
09.FAX SPEED  
2.LINE MONITOR  
3.POLLING  
01.POLLING  
02.PRINTER P.S.  
03.DEPARTMENT CODE  
04.ACCOUNT CODE  
05.LINE MONITOR  
06.RECEIVE INTERVAL  
07.ECM  
08.SORT COPY  
09.REDIAL MODE  
10.RECEPTION MODE  
1.FAX  
+
02.POLLING RESERVE  
03.TURNAROUND POLL  
04.PROG. CONT. POLL  
4.PAGE NUMBER  
5.SECURE RX  
6.ITU MAILBOX  
2.FAX/TAD  
01.CONFIDENTIAL  
3.TEL/FAX  
02.BULLETIN BOARD  
03.RELAY REQUEST  
04.SETUP & DELETE  
4.MANUAL  
11.COPY REDUCTION  
2.SCANNER & PRINTER  
2.LISTS  
1.FUNCTION  
01.DOCUMENT MODE  
02.DOCUMENT LENGTH  
03.PAPER SIZE  
04.RESET DRUM COUNT  
05.LETTER HEAD PAPER  
2.RESERVATION  
3.DEPARTMENT  
4.ITU MAILBOX  
5.TELEPHONE NBRS  
3.TX SETTINGS  
01.ALL OF LISTS  
02.ABB NUMBERS  
03.ONE TOUCH NUMBERS  
04.GROUP NUMBERS  
05.ALPHABETICAL  
01.MEMORY TX  
02.SECURITY TX  
03.COVER SHEET  
04.RECOVERY TX  
05.TTI  
3.TEL LIST ENTRY  
06.SEND AFTER SCAN  
1.ABB NUMBERS  
4.RX SETTINGS  
2.ONE TOUCH KEYS  
3.GROUP NUMBERS  
4.INITIAL SETUP  
01.SECURE RX  
02.MEMORY RX  
03.RX REDUCTION  
04.DISCARD  
1.LANGUAGE  
2.DATE & TIME  
3.TERMINAL ID  
4.DIAL TYPE  
05.REV. ORDER PRINT  
06.PRIVILEGED RX  
07.RTI  
08.RX SEPARATOR  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power Failure List  
This facsimile not have a battery  
to back up the document  
memory contents. When the  
power is turned off (due to a  
power failure, etc.) and the com-  
munication data stored in  
memory is cleared, a list of the  
File Numbers of those cleared  
communications will be printed.  
POWER FAILURE LIST  
TIME  
TEL NUMBER :  
NAME  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
:MAY-17-00 14:25  
12345678901234567890  
:
POLLING/FAX M-BOX/MAILBOX FILE NBR FUNCTION  
Printing Procedure  
001  
005  
006  
010  
MULTI TX  
POLLING RX  
PRG. CONT POLL  
MULTI POLLING  
This list is automatically printed  
after recovery from a power fail-  
ure event.  
POLLING/FAX M-BOX/MAILBOX FILE NBR FUNCTION  
MAIL  
FROM  
LOCAL  
DATE  
MAY-16  
9999999999999MAY-17  
TIME  
11:23  
101  
106  
POLLING  
CONFIDENTIAL BOX  
*1234567890#12345678  
###***#123#999*  
07:55  
107  
FILE NBR  
222  
BULLETIN BOARD  
LOCAL  
FROM  
MAY-17  
DATE  
07:55  
TIME  
MEMORY RECEPTION  
*1234567890123456789MAY-16 21:37  
RECOVERY TX  
FILE NBR FUNCTION  
333  
SINGLE TX  
Type of  
communication  
Station where the  
communication or the  
Mail Box is input  
Time of Input  
Box Number  
File Number of the  
communication  
(in case of Mail Box  
communication)  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Error Messages  
If an abnormal condition arises  
Error Message  
Cause / Solution  
Error Message  
Cause / Solution  
in the facsimile or an incorrect  
operation is performed, an alarm  
buzzer is generated for about 4  
seconds and a message to indi-  
cate the nature of the error ap-  
pears in the LCD window. In  
that case, take corrective action  
according to the following table.  
Autodialer numbers and initial  
settings have been lost (due to a  
long period without power or a  
depleted backup battery).  
The maximum number of manu-  
ally input phone numbers (100)  
has been reached.  
BROKEN REGISTRATION  
JOB MEMORY FULL  
Split your transmission into two  
or more jobs.  
Press  
to restore the idle  
MEMORY OVERFLOW  
There is not enough memory to  
perform the requested operation.  
state. If this Error Message is re-  
peatedly displayed, machine pro-  
gramming has become corrupt-  
ed. The machine must be re-initi-  
atized by a trained technician.  
Call for service.  
Press  
to cancel the  
message. Do the operation over  
again with the Direct Document  
Transmission, or do the opera-  
tion again when enough residual  
memory is regained.  
POWER FAILURE  
A power failure occurred during a  
communication, etc. The con-  
tents of memory were cleared  
due to a long power-off condi-  
tion.  
A document jam has occurred.  
DOCUMENT JAM  
Remove the jammed document  
(see page 218).  
A Power Failure List is printed.  
Confirm the list contents (see  
page 211).  
A recording paper jam has oc-  
curred or paper size is mismatch.  
PAPER SIZE ERROR OR  
PAPER JAM XX  
RX COVER OPEN OR NO  
PROCESS UNIT  
The top cover is open or no Ton-  
er Cartridge and Drum Unit ex-  
ists.  
Remove the jammed paper or  
change the setting to select the  
current paper size (see pages  
21, 214, 219).  
Firmly close the top cover or in-  
stall the Toner Cartridge and  
Drum Unit.  
No paper exists in the upper pa-  
per tray.  
MEMORY FULL  
The memory set aside for speed  
dial numbers (i.e. One Touch  
Keys and Abbreviated Dial Num-  
bers) has been exhausted.  
UPPER PAPER EMPTY  
Supply recording paper to the  
upper paper tray.  
Delete unneed numbers, alter-  
nate numbers, and unnecessary  
pauses. Use shorter names for  
the dialing addresses.  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Messages - continued  
Error Message  
Error Message  
Cause / Solution  
Cause / Solution  
LOWER PAPER EMPTY  
CHECK TELEPHONE LINE  
No paper exists in the lower pa-  
per tray. This error occurs with  
an optional paper tray installed.  
Line is not connected to the tele-  
phone line.  
Correctly connect  
a
modular  
Supply recording paper to the  
lower paper tray.  
phone cord between the tele-  
phone line jack and the LINE  
connector on the rear side of the  
machine (see page 11).  
PAPER EMPTY  
No recording paper exists in any  
paper tray.  
DEVICE ERROR XX  
A printer system failure has oc-  
curred.  
Supply recording paper to the  
paper tray(s).  
Power your machine off, then  
back on. If the error condition is  
cleared, confirm normal opera-  
tion. If the error condition returns,  
call your service representative.  
TONER LOW  
The toner is nearly exhausted  
(warning).  
Replace the toner.  
The toner is exhausted.  
Replace the toner (see page 29).  
TONER EMPTY  
The drum unit is approaching the  
end of its life (warning).  
DRUM UNIT WARNING  
Replace the drum unit (see page  
31).  
The drum unit has reached the  
end of its life.  
REPLACE DRUM UNIT  
Replace the drum unit (see page  
31).  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper Jam Error Codes  
If a paper jam occurs during a reception or copying operation, the message “PAPER  
SIZE ERROR OR PAPER JAM XX” is displayed. If this occurs, follow the procedure  
below.  
The code number “XX” indicates the location of the paper jam as shown in the table  
below.  
Error  
Code  
Cause  
How to Correct  
10  
A paper jam has occurred in the  
Recording Paper Tray or Bypass  
Tray.  
Remove the jammed recording pa-  
per.  
20  
80  
A paper jam has occurred in the  
Optional Recording Paper Tray.  
Remove the jammed recording pa-  
per.  
A paper jam has occurred at the  
paper feed section of the paper  
transport path.  
Open the Top Cover, remove the  
Toner Cartridge and Drum Unit, and  
remove the jammed recording paper.  
Open the Top Cover, remove the  
Toner Cartridge and Drum Unit, and  
remove the jammed recording paper.  
90  
A paper jam has occurred at the  
paper exit section of the paper  
transport path.  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Codes Printed on Reports  
When an Error Code is printed as a status indication on Transmission Reports, etc., refer to the following description for the applicable Error Code to determine the cause.  
Error  
Code  
Error  
Code  
Cause  
How to Correct  
Cause  
Memory Overflow  
How to Correct  
10  
Paper Empty  
Load recording paper and set the  
tray.  
42  
Wait until the memory is recovered  
by completing some of the reserved  
jobs or remove other causes if any,  
then retry the communication.  
11  
Recording Paper Jam  
Open the top cover and clear the re-  
cording paper jam.  
Send the document again.  
12  
13  
20  
Document Paper Jam  
Top Cover Open  
Power Failure  
Remove the jammed document.  
Close the cover, then retry.  
50  
53  
Line Busy  
Confirm the remote party’s security  
Security Mismatch in Relay or Mail code, password, and your setup.  
Box transmission  
Retry the transmission or ask the re-  
mote party to transmit the document  
again.  
Retry the communication. Frequent  
failures may indicate a phone line  
B0-B5 Signal Error or Line Condition Error problem. If possible, move the unit  
C0-C4  
D0-D2  
F0, F1  
to another line and try your commu-  
nications again.  
E0  
E6  
Error relating to the printer or  
memory.  
Remove the cause of the error on  
the printer, if any. Then ask the re-  
mote party to retry the transmission.  
If not corrected, call your service rep-  
resentative.  
Retry the transmission.  
87  
No residual memory was remaining  
on the remote party’s machine for  
Relay or Mailbox transmission.  
22  
30  
File Error due to a Directory Error  
Power the unit ON/OFF, then retry.  
Retry the transmission or ask the re-  
mote party to transmit the document  
again.  
was pressed during the  
communication.  
Page # Mismatch  
Polling Error  
32  
33  
Check the actual document count.  
Check polling options setup (security  
code, etc.), and check if the polling  
document exists.  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transmission Problems  
When transmissions are not performed normally, check the points in the table below.  
If the facsimile will not operate correctly after confirming these points or anything not  
listed here occurs, call your service representative.  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
When document pag-  
es are fed into the  
unit, two pages are  
drawn into the slot.  
Too many document pages Set a maximum of 30 pages  
are set.  
(Letter size) for one transmis-  
sion sequence.  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
When you place a You have a machine error. Clear the error.  
document in the Check the display for an er-  
document tray, noth- ror message (see pages  
The Operation Panel is not Close the Operation Panel until  
closed fully.  
it clicks at the two latching posi-  
tions.  
ing happens.  
212 and 213).  
The document extension Extend it fully to support the  
Tray is not fully extended. document sufficiently.  
There is no power to the Make sure the power plug is  
facsimile.  
plugged into the AC outlet and  
the power switch is ON.  
Something is wrong with the Check the document to see if it  
document paper itself.  
satisfies the requirements (see  
page 81).  
You returned the handset Send the document again being  
before you pressed  
When you press  
in Direct  
The ADF pad is dirty.  
Clean the ADF pad.  
sure to press  
before re-  
(when using the  
The sending proce- The document was loaded Load the document face down.  
dure was completed, with a wrong side down.  
but nothing was re-  
turning the handset.  
Document Transmis-  
sion Mode, the mes-  
sage “DIALING” or  
“COMMUNICATING”  
does not appear on  
the LCD display.  
optional handset).  
The Operation Panel is not Close the Operation Panel until  
corded on the record-  
The modular cord (the tele- Check the modular cord connec-  
phone line cable) is not cor- tion between the wall socket and  
rectly connected.  
closed fully.  
it clicks at the two latching posi-  
tions.  
ing paper of the re-  
ceiving party or the  
image was elongated.  
the facsimile. Press  
and  
confirm you can hear a dial tone.  
The sending proce- The remote party’s unit is Verify the remote party’s unit.  
dure was completed not compatible with yours.  
correctly, but nothing  
happened.  
This facsimile can communicate  
with G3 machines but not G4  
machines.  
The Dial Type setting of the Set the correct Dial Type in ac-  
facsimile is wrong.  
cordance with the line used for  
the facsimile (see page 44).  
Documents cannot be Poor telephone line condi- Retry sending the document us-  
There is no dial tone or Try a voice call through the  
something else is wrong handset or the remote telephone  
sent overseas.  
tions.  
ing to the “Quality Transmission”  
procedure (see page 183).  
with the phone line.  
set.  
Documents are  
fed obliquely  
(i.e. skewed).  
The document is not set  
correctly in the Document erly (but not too tightly).  
Tray.  
Align the document guides prop-  
The Operation Panel is not Close the Operation Panel until  
closed fully.  
it clicks at the two latching posi-  
tions.  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reception Problems  
When receptions are not performed normally, check the points in the table below. If  
the facsimile will not operate correctly after confirming these points or anything not  
listed here occurs, call your service representatives.  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
After the recording The recording paper is not Check the paper installation,  
installed correctly. and make sure it is correct.  
paper has been re-  
placed, PAPER  
a
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
EMPTY error mes-  
sage remains on the  
LCD display.  
When you are to re- A document is still in your  
ceive document facsimile.  
and you press  
Press  
to remove the  
a
The original document on Ask the sending party if the  
the sending side is of poor document contents are clear  
The received docu-  
ment is difficult to  
document.  
quality.  
enough.  
read.  
lines are printed.  
Unnecessary  
The modular cord (tele-  
phone line cable) is dis-  
connected.  
Firmly connect the modular  
cord at both ends.  
nothing hap-  
The sending unit requires Ask the sending party to make  
adjustment.  
pens.  
Press  
and confirm you  
a copy of the same document  
using their facsimile. If the qual-  
ity is poor, the problem is in the  
sending party’s unit.  
can hear a dial tone.  
There is no power to the Check that the power plug is  
unit.  
plugged into the AC outlet and  
the power switch is ON.  
The recording unit requires If a copy is made on your fac-  
cleaning.  
simile and the quality is poor,  
clean the recording unit.  
There is no recording pa- Load recording paper in the re-  
per.  
cording paper tray.  
The remote party loaded Request the remote party to  
You receive a docu-  
ment that is com-  
pletely blank, even  
though you and the  
remote party followed  
the correct proce-  
dures.  
The top cover is not closed Press down the top cover until it  
the document face up.  
make sure that document is  
loaded correctly.  
fully.  
clicks at the two latching posi-  
tions.  
(If the handset is installed  
and after talking with the  
remote party through the  
handset) the handset is re-  
turned before pressing  
Press  
first, then return  
the handset.  
The recording paper tray is Check the tray.  
not firmly closed.  
Recording paper jam  
occurs frequently.  
Something is wrong with Use recording paper with the  
.
the recording paper itself.  
desired specifications.  
Something is wrong with Ask the sending party to re-  
the sending machine.  
transmit the document.  
The recording paper The top cover is not closed Press down the top cover until it  
does not come out.  
fully.  
clicks at the two latching posi-  
tions.  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clearing a Document Jam  
If a document jam occurs during  
Open the Operation  
Panel  
Close the Operation  
Panel  
Remove Other  
Documents  
Remove the  
Jammed Document  
a transmission, the message  
“DOCUMENT JAM” is displayed  
in the LCD window. Follow this  
procedure to clear a document  
jam.  
2
4
1
3
Document  
64  
49  
62  
63  
Leave the power of the facsimile  
ON. Remove other documents  
from the Document Support, if  
any (except the jammed por-  
tion).  
Open the Operation Panel.  
Remove the jammed document.  
Check for pieces of paper, clips,  
or staples which may have  
caused the failure.  
Firmly close the Operation Pan-  
el.  
Confirm that the LCD display in-  
dicates that the facsimile is in  
the Standby Mode.  
NOTE:  
As for a document that has  
jammed in the facsimile,  
make a duplicate using a  
copier and do the transmis-  
sion over again with the new  
duplicate used as the send-  
ing document.  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clearing a Recording Paper Jam  
If a recording paper jam occurs  
Remove the  
Documents  
Pull Up the Document  
Exit Tray  
Remove the Jammed  
Paper (Bypass Tray)  
Remove the Bypass  
Tray  
during a reception or a copying  
operation, the message “PA-  
PER SIZE ERROR OR PAPER  
JAM XX” is displayed in the  
LCD window. Follow this proce-  
dure to clear the jam.  
1
2
3
4
Document  
The code number “XX” indicates  
the location where the paper  
jam has occurred as shown in  
the table below.  
50  
81  
25  
49  
Code  
Location  
Leave the power of the facsimile Lift up on the Document Exit  
ON. Tray so that it catches under the  
If a document is in the Docu- Control Panel.  
ment Support or Document Exit  
Remove the jammed paper from  
the Bypass Tray.  
Remove the Bypass Tray.  
10 In the Paper Tray and  
Bypass Tray  
20 In the Optional Paper  
Tray  
Tray, remove the document.  
80 At the paper feed area  
CAUTION:  
Do not place heavy objects  
on the Document Exit Tray  
or apply strong force.  
90 At the paper exit area  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clearing a Recording Paper Jam - continued  
Remove the Jammed  
Paper (Optional  
Recording Paper Tray)  
Remove the Jammed  
Paper (Paper Tray)  
Pull Out the Optional  
Recording Paper Tray  
Insert the Optional  
Recording Paper Tray  
Open the Top Cover  
5
6
7
8
9
51  
55  
73  
78  
37  
Remove the jammed paper from Remove the Optional Recording  
Remove the stack of paper from  
the Optional Recording Paper  
Tray and remove the jammed  
paper from the machine.  
Insert the Optional Recording Push the Top Cover Open But-  
Paper Tray all the way into the ton and open the Top Cover.  
machine.  
the Paper Tray.  
Paper Tray.  
NOTE:  
As the tray is inserted, listen  
for the sound of the paper  
pressure plate moving up  
into position.  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clearing a Recording Paper Jam - continued  
Remove the Jammed  
Paper  
(Paper Feed Area)  
Remove the Toner Cartridge and Drum Unit  
Pull Up the Paper  
Guide  
Remove the Jammed  
Paper (Fuser Area)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
56  
59  
44  
58  
38  
Remove the Toner Cartridge and Drum Unit.  
CAUTION:  
Pull up the Paper Guide.  
Remove the jammed paper  
while pressing the Paper Guide  
to the front of the machine.  
Avoid tearing the paper.  
If the paper is jammed partway  
through the Fuser Unit (black  
colored housing), remove the  
jammed paper in the direction of  
the arrow. Avoid tearing the pa-  
per.  
Always hold the Drum Unit and Toner Cartridge by the green  
handle. Do not expose the green drum to light for more than 3  
minutes. Never expose it to direct sunlight or touch the green  
drum. Damage or poor print quality may result.  
CAUTIONS  
•
Do no touch the image  
Transfer Roller.  
NOTE:  
Avoid touching the toner to your clothing since toner cannot be  
removed easily.  
If the toner sticks to your clothing, immediately rinse out the  
toner with cold water.  
•
The black colored fuser  
housing may be hot if the  
machine was in use prior  
to this paper jam.  
NOTE:  
If a paper is jammed before  
toner on the paper is fused,  
be careful not to stain your  
hand or fingers with toner  
when removing the jammed  
paper.  
It is recommended to fold the  
edge of jammed paper as  
shown in the figure when  
you remove the jammed pa-  
per.  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clearing a Recording Paper Jam - continued  
Remove the Jammed  
Install the Drum Unit  
Install the Toner Cartridge  
Close the Top Cover  
14  
15  
16  
17  
Paper  
(Paper Exit Area)  
2
2
2
2
45  
43  
40  
41  
60  
Press down on the Top Cover  
until a “Click” is heard to ensure  
the latches engage.  
Open the Paper Exit Guide and  
remove the jammed paper.  
Install the Drum Unit into the  
machine, aligning the guides of  
the Unit with the grooves inside  
the machine.  
Color coordinated “1” labels  
have been affixed to the Drum  
Unit and to the inside of the ma-  
chine. Install the Drum Unit by  
aligning these labels.  
Holding  
onto  
the  
Toner  
Cartridge’s handle, lower it into  
the machine. Make sure that the  
four pins (two on each side) fit  
into the grooves inside the ma-  
chine.  
Color coordinated “2” labels  
have been affixed to the Toner  
Cartridge and to the inside of  
the machine. Install the Toner  
Cartridge by aligning these la-  
bels.  
Verify the display has returned  
to the Standby Mode.  
42  
Make sure the Drum Unit is in-  
serted inside the machine as far  
as it will go.  
61  
As the Toner Cartridge is low-  
ered into the machine, its  
handle will rotate first to the rear  
of the machine and then to the  
front.  
IMPORTANT:  
•
Never touch the photocon-  
ductive drum (the green sur-  
face) of the Drum Unit. If the  
NOTE:  
Insure both sides of Paper  
Exit Guide are properly latch  
upon completion of jam re-  
moval.  
surface  
is  
scarred  
or  
scratched, it will cause print  
quality problems.  
The cartridge will click into place  
when it is completely installed.  
•
Do not expose the photocon-  
ductive drum of the Drum  
Unit to light for more than 3  
minutes. If the Drum Unit is  
to be left anywhere outside  
the facsimile, be certain to  
cover it with cloth, paper,  
etc.  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clearing a Recording Paper Jam - continued  
If there is any received  
document stored in  
memory ...  
Return the Document  
Exit Tray, etc.  
18  
If a recording paper jam oc-  
curs during a reception, the  
received documents are au-  
tomatically stored in memo-  
ry. In that case, the facsimile  
will automatically print out  
the received contents stored  
in memory after clearing the  
paper jam (if power was not  
turned off).  
79  
Return the Paper Exit Tray, Pa-  
per and Bypass Trays to their  
normal positions.  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the Recorded Image is not Clear...  
If the Document Scanner Unit is  
dirty, your documents may not  
be transmitted clearly. If the Re-  
cording Unit is dirty, the docu-  
ment you receive may not be  
clear. In that case, clean the  
Document Scanner Cleaning Procedure  
Wipe the Glass  
Open the Operation  
Wipe the ADF Pad  
and Rollers  
1
3
2
Surface and White  
Plate  
Panel  
Stained  
Document Scanner Unit or Re-  
If the problem occurs during  
cording Unit using the following  
both a transmission and in copy  
procedures. You can check  
mode, check the Document  
these problems by making a  
Scanner Unit.  
copy.  
If the problem occurs during  
both receptions and copy mode,  
Examples of print problem:  
check the Recording Unit.  
62  
65  
66  
Open the Operation Panel.  
Wipe the Glass surface and the Wipe the ADF Pad and Rollers  
White Plate with a soft dry cloth.  
with a dry cloth.  
Vertical black line(s)  
•
If it is very dirty, wipe it with  
a cloth soaked in water and  
wrung out, then wipe it with a  
dry cloth.  
•
If it is very dirty, wipe it with  
a cloth soaked in water and  
wrung out, then wipe it with a  
dry cloth.  
CAUTION:  
Be careful not to injure your  
Vertical white line(s)  
Horizontal black line(s)  
Horizontal white line(s)  
finger(s) on the ADF spring  
when you wipe the ADF pad.  
Faint or blurred print  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the Recorded Image is not Clear... - continued  
Document Scanner Cleaning Procedure - continued  
Close the Operation  
4
Panel  
64  
Close the Operation Panel.  
•
Make sure that the hooks on  
both sides are firmly latched.  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the Recorded Image is not Clear... - continued  
Recording Unit Cleaning Procedure  
Remove the Toner Cartridge and Drum Unit  
Pull Up the Paper  
Guide  
Open the Top Cover  
Wipe the Paper  
Pickup Roller, etc.  
2
3
1
4
37  
56  
67  
44  
38  
Push the Top Cover Open But-  
ton to open the Top Cover.  
Wipe the Paper Pickup Roller  
and Paper Guide with a dry  
cloth. If the surfaces require  
moisture to remove the dirt, use  
a cloth slightly dampened with  
water to remove the dirt, fol-  
lowed by a dry cloth.  
Pull up on the Paper Guide that  
protects the paper pickup roller  
located at the button of the ma-  
chine chamber.  
Remove the Toner Cartridge and Drum Unit.  
CAUTION:  
Always hold the Drum Unit and Toner Cartridge by the green  
handle. Do not expose the green drum to light for more than 3  
minutes. Never expose it to direct sunlight or touch the green  
drum. Damage or poor print quality may result.  
NOTE:  
If a problem with the Record-  
ing Unit remains after this  
action, you may require a  
new Toner Cartridge or  
Drum Unit.  
Check for dirt or paper under  
the Toner Cartridge and  
Drum Unit first. Call your ser-  
vice representative for assis-  
tance.  
NOTE:  
Avoid touching the toner to your clothing since toner cannot be  
removed easily.  
If the toner sticks to your clothing, immediately rinse out the  
toner with cold water.  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the Recorded Image is not Clear... - continued  
Recording Unit Cleaning Procedure - continued  
Install the Toner Cartridge  
Wipe the Bottom  
Side of Paper Guide  
Close the Top Cover  
Install the Drum Unit  
7
5
8
6
2
2
2
2
45  
68  
40  
41  
43  
Install the Drum Unit into the ma-  
chine, aligning the guides of the  
Unit with the grooves inside the  
machine.  
Color coordinated “1” labels have  
been affixed to the Drum Unit  
and to the inside of the machine.  
Install the Drum Unit by aligning  
these labels.  
Press down on the Top Cover  
until a “Click” is heard to ensure  
the latches engage.  
Wipe the bottom side of Paper  
Guide with a dry cloth.  
Holding onto the Toner Car-  
tridge’s handle, lower it into the  
machine. Make sure that the  
four pins (two on each side) fit  
into the grooves inside the ma-  
chine.  
Color coordinated “2” labels  
have been affixed to the Toner  
Cartridge and to the inside of  
the machine. Install the Toner  
Cartridge by aligning these la-  
bels.  
If the surfaces require moisture  
to remove the dirt, use a cloth  
slightly dampened with water to  
remove the dirt, followed by a  
dry cloth.  
Verify the display has returned  
to the Standby Mode.  
42  
Make sure the Drum Unit is in-  
serted inside the machine as far  
as it will go.  
IMPORTANT:  
As the Toner Cartridge is low-  
ered into the machine its handle  
will rotate first to the rear of the  
machine and then to the front.  
•
Never touch the photocon-  
ductive drum (the green sur-  
face) of the Drum Unit. If the  
surface  
is  
scarred  
or  
scratched, it will cause print  
quality problems.  
The cartridge will click into place  
when it is completely installed.  
•
Do not expose the photocon-  
ductive drum of the Drum Unit  
to light for more than 3 min-  
utes. If the Drum Unit is to be  
left anywhere outside the fac-  
simile, be certain to cover it  
with cloth, paper, etc.  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
USER TEST MODE - AUTOMATIC TEST MODE  
AUTO TEST  
AUTO TEST mode permits you to automatically perform a series of  
machine tests in one operation.  
Display the TEST  
MODE Menu  
Select the AUTO  
TEST Menu  
Completed the  
AUTO TEST  
1
2
3
The test items performed by the AUTO TEST are:  
Press:  
Press:  
When all the tests end, the word  
“OPERATION COMPLETED” is  
displayed on the screen and a  
Test Pattern is printed. After  
printing, the display returns to  
showing the standby mode  
screen.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
FLASH ROM TEST  
Checks the program data, function data, and language data.  
+
SRAM TEST  
Checks the SRAM Memory.  
The auto test starts, appears  
on the screen indicating that the  
test is under way.  
DRAM TEST  
Checks the DRAM Memory.  
The results of the auto test can  
be confirmed with the self test  
report. To print the self test re-  
MODEM TEST  
Checks the modem and checks for phone line current.  
TEST MODE  
1.AUTO TEST  
AUTO TEST  
------------------  
-
port, refer to “PRINTING  
TEST RESULT” on page 239.  
A
2.INDIVIDUAL TEST  
SCANNER TEST  
Checks the image scanner.  
3.TEST RESULT LIST  
If the result of the auto test is  
judged to be NG, call your ser-  
vice representative.  
CODEC TEST  
Checks the CODEC IC.  
AUTO TEST  
--------------  
-
PRINTER TEST  
Checks the printer components for proper operation and prints  
one test page.  
To suspend the auto test, press  
.
NOTE: AUTO TEST cannot be performed if data (such as received  
data, delayed transmission, or polling data) is stored in  
memory.  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
- INDIVIDUAL TEST MODE  
INDIVIDUAL TEST Summary  
In INDIVIDUAL TEST mode,  
you can perform specific tests  
on this facsimile.  
Select the Desired  
INDIVIDUAL TEST  
(01-07)  
Enter the INDIVIDUAL  
TEST Menu  
1
2
Press:  
Press  
or  
until  
the desired INDIVIDUAL TEST  
is displayed or enter the desired  
INDIVIDUAL TEST (01 through  
07) using the dial keypad.  
+
+
INDIVIDUAL TEST  
01.ADF TEST  
02.KEY TEST  
03.LED TEST  
04.LCD TEST  
05.SPEAKER TEST  
06.SENSOR TEST  
07.PRINT TEST  
NOTE:  
Only 1 selection can be dis-  
played at one time.  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADF TEST  
The ADF test checks the opera-  
tion of the ADF by transporting  
and unloading documents. You  
can check that the ADF is nor-  
mal if the number of documents  
loaded is consistent with the  
number of documents trans-  
ported and unloaded.  
Select the ADF TEST  
Menu  
Select the ADF Test  
Result  
Load the Documents  
1
3
2
Press:  
If a document jam occurs during  
transport, the screen below is  
displayed.  
Load the documents in the  
document support.  
If the number of documents  
loaded is consistent with the  
number of documents unload,  
press:  
ADF TEST  
PRESS[START]  
+
+
+
+
ADF TEST  
DOCUMENT JAM  
Press:  
Remove the jammed docu-  
ments, the screen below is dis-  
played.  
If a document has not fed prop-  
erly (even once), press:  
ADF TEST  
[STOP] TO COMPLETE  
The documents will be trans-  
ported one by one and the num-  
ber of documents unloaded will  
be displayed at the lower right  
on the screen.  
To continue the ADF Test,  
press:  
ADF TEST  
PAGES  
01  
ADF TEST  
LOAD DOCUMENT  
To end the test, press:  
Return to Step 2.  
You can change the transport  
speed by pressing  
.
STD:  
Fast  
Go to Step 3.  
FINE (Same when HALF  
TONE is set): Medium  
ADF TEST  
1.OK  
U-FINE (Same when HALF  
TONE is set): Slow  
2.NG  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADF TEST - continued  
Completed the  
ADF TEST  
4
The word “OPERATION COM-  
PLETED” is displayed on the  
screen and the unit returns to  
the individual test selection  
screen.  
The result of the ADF test can  
be confirmed with the self test  
report. To print the self test re-  
port, refer to “PRINTING  
TEST RESULT” on page 239.  
A
If the result of the ADF test is  
judged to be NG, call your ser-  
vice representative.  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
KEY TEST  
The key test checks key switch  
operation on the Operation  
Panel.  
Select the Key Test  
Menu  
Check the Keys  
Completed the  
KEY TEST  
Exit the Key Test  
Mode  
1
2
4
3
Press:  
Press all the key switches ex- Press:  
cept  
The result of the key test can be  
confirmed with the self test re-  
port. To print the self test report,  
refer to “PRINTING A TEST RE-  
SULT” on page 239.  
.
+
+
+
+
The result of the key test (“OK”  
or “NG”) is displayed on the  
screen, and the unit returns to  
the individual test menu screen.  
If all the keys except  
If the result of the key test is  
judged to be NG, call your ser-  
vice representative.  
have been detected, the screen  
below is displayed.  
KEY TEST  
PRESS [STOP]  
KEY TEST  
OK  
Unless  
is pressed  
within 10 seconds after the  
screen in Step 2 is displayed,  
the test result is judged to be  
NG.  
KEY TEST  
PRESS [STOP] LAST  
KEY TEST  
NG  
NOTE:  
The name of each key is dis-  
played on the LCD after it is  
pressed.  
NOTE:  
If you press  
before  
you press every key, the  
machine will reset to the In-  
dividual Test menu screen  
and no test result will be is-  
sued.  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LED TEST  
The LED test checks LED op-  
eration by lighting all the LEDs  
on the Operation Panel.  
Select the LED TEST  
Menu  
Check the LCDs  
Select the Test Result  
Option  
Completed the  
LED TEST  
1
2
3
4
Press:  
Visually check that all the LEDs If all the LEDs turn on, press:  
are on. After checking, press  
The word “OPERATION COM-  
PLETED” is displayed on the  
screen and the unit returns to  
the individual test selection  
screen.  
.
+
+
+
+
If even one LED is not lit, press:  
The result of the LED test can  
be confirmed with the self test  
report. To print the self test re-  
LED TEST  
1.OK  
port, refer to “PRINTING  
TEST” on page 239.  
A
2.NG  
If the result of the LED test is  
judged to be NG, call your ser-  
vice representative.  
All the LEDs blink or light with  
the following message dis-  
played.  
LED TEST  
[STOP] TO COMPLETED  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LCD TEST  
The LCD test checks LCD op-  
eration by turning on and off all  
the elements of the LCD on the  
Operation Panel.  
Completed the  
LCD TEST  
Select the LCD TEST  
Menu  
Start the LCD Test  
Select the Test Result  
Option  
4
1
2
3
If all elements of the LCD turn  
on and off normally, press:  
Press:  
Press:  
The word “OPERATION COM-  
PLETED” is displayed on the  
screen and the unit returns to  
the individual test selection  
screen.  
+
+
+
+
The result of the LCD test can  
be confirmed with the self test  
report. To print the self test re-  
An underline moves from the  
first column through the last col-  
umn of the LCD, and then all  
elements turn on as shown.  
If even one element fails to turn  
on and off, press:  
port, refer to “PRINTING  
TEST RESULT” on page 239.  
A
A
If the result of the LCD test is  
judged to be NG, call your ser-  
vice representative.  
LCD TEST  
PRESS [START]  
Displayed for 5 seconds  
LCD TEST  
1.OK  
2.NG  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPEAKER TEST  
The speaker test checks speak-  
er operation by changing the  
volume output from the speaker.  
Completed the  
SPEAKER TEST  
Select the SPEAKER  
TEST Menu  
Check the Speaker  
Volume  
Select the Test Result  
Option  
4
1
2
3
Press:  
If all volumes are output nor-  
mally, press:  
The word “OPERATION COM-  
PLETED” is displayed on the  
screen and the unit returns to  
the individual test selection  
screen.  
Pressing  
changes  
+
+
+
+
the volume level from “>” (mini-  
mum) to “>>>>>>” (maximum)  
and “OFF” (no sound).  
The result of the speaker test  
can be confirmed with the self  
test report. To print the self test  
report, refer to “PRINTING A  
TEST RESULT” on page 239.  
If even one of them is not output  
normally, press:  
>
>>  
>>>  
>>>>  
>>>>>  
>>>>>>  
OFF  
If the result of the speaker test  
is judged to be NG, call your  
service representative.  
After checking, press:  
SPEAKER TEST  
PRESS [START]  
SPEAKER TEST  
1.OK  
2.NG  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SENSOR TEST  
The switch test checks if the de-  
tection switches operate nor-  
mally.  
Select the SWITCH  
TEST Menu  
Check the Top Cover  
Check the Paper Tray  
1
2
3
Press:  
Open the Top Cover. When its  
open state is detected, the  
screen below appears. After  
checking that the screen is dis-  
played, close the Top Cover.  
Remove the Recording Paper in  
the Recording Paper Tray.  
When the absence of a Paper is  
detected, the screen below ap-  
pears. After checking that the  
screen is displayed, install the  
Recording Paper in the Paper  
Tray.  
If an Optional Recording Paper  
Tray is installed, follow the  
same test procedure for the Op-  
tional Recording Paper Tray.  
The test items in SWITCH TEST  
mode are as follows:  
•
Detection of Top Cover  
open/closed status  
+
+
+
+
SENSOR TEST  
REMOVE PAPER TRAY 2  
•
Detection of Recording Pa-  
per and Recording Paper  
Tray presence/absence sta-  
tus  
Detects the open state  
of the Top Cover.  
Detects the absence of  
the Recording Paper  
Detects the absence of  
the Recording Paper.  
SENSOR TEST  
CLOSE TOP COVER  
NOTE:  
If no operation is performed  
SENSOR TEST  
PUT IN PAPER TRAY 2  
SENSOR TEST  
PUT IN PAPER  
Close the cover  
within 10 seconds after an  
operational instruction is dis-  
played on the screen during  
the switch test, the test result  
will be judged to be NG.  
Install the Recording Paper  
Install the Recording  
Paper  
SENSOR TEST  
REMOVE PAPER  
The result of the switch test  
(“OK” or “NG”) is displayed on  
the screen, and the unit returns  
to the individual test selection  
screen.  
SENSOR TEST  
OK  
If no recording paper is placed  
in the Recording Paper Tray,  
the screen below is displayed.  
You can resume the test by  
loading the paper.  
SENSOR TEST  
OPEN TOP COVER  
SWITCH TEST  
PUT IN PAPER  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SENSOR TEST - continued  
Completed the  
SENSOR TEST  
4
The result of the sensor test can  
be confirmed with the self test  
report. To print the self test re-  
port, refer to “PRINTING  
TEST RESULT” on page 239.  
A
If the result of the sensor test is  
judged to be NG, call your ser-  
vice representative.  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PRINT TEST  
The print test checks the print function by printing a test pattern.  
Select the TEST  
PRINT Menu  
Select the Print  
Result Option  
Completed the  
PRINT TEST  
1
2
3
Print Sample  
If the test pattern prints properly, The word “OPERATION COM-  
Press:  
press:  
PLETED” is displayed on the  
screen and the unit returns to  
the individual test selection  
screen.  
+
+
+
+
The result of the print test can  
be confirmed with the self test  
report. To print the self test re-  
port, refer to “PRINTING  
TEST RESULT” on page 239.  
A
If the test pattern did not print  
properly, press:  
If the result of the print test is  
judged to be NG, call your ser-  
vice representative.  
PRINT TEST  
PRINTING LIST  
The test pattern is printed.  
PRINT TEST  
1.YES  
2.ON  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
- TEST RESULT  
PRINTING a TEST RESULT  
This test result list prints out the results of the individual tests as a  
self test report.  
Select the TEST  
RESULT Menu  
1
Press:  
Print Sample  
+
+
After completion of the list out-  
put, the display returns to the  
standby mode screen.  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE SERVICE - RDC (Remote Diagnosis Configuration) Service  
This machine has a function to receive the following services remotely. (Consult your authorized TOSHIBA dealer for assistance in using this function.)  
RDC (Remote Diagnosis Configuration)  
This service enables the machine to be dialed from a service center to retrieve information and reports, set various machine settings, program data, and upgrading the  
firmware in the machine.  
A separate contract with the service center will be required to receive this RDC service.  
NOTES:  
•
This capability is currently under development and is not yet available. This RDC Service will be restricted to TOSHIBA trained technicians working for TOSHIBA  
authorized dealers and will not be available in all areas.  
•
This function is not available in the United States.  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
- AUTOMATIC SUPPLIES ORDER  
Automatic Supplies Order Setting  
This machine can automatically send an order sheet to a designated fax machine informing your supplier that a replacement Drum Kit or Toner Kit is required.  
Contact your local authorized dealer for information on this setting.  
NOTE:  
This function is not available in the United States.  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIFICATIONS  
Document Size:  
Power Required:  
120 VAC, 60 Hz  
Width ..... 216 mm (8.5 inches) max.  
148 mm (5.83 inches) min.  
Power Consumed:  
Max. 620 W (operating), 2 W or less (standby in  
Super Power Saver mode)  
Length ... 1000 mm (39.37 inches) max.  
100 mm (3.94 inches) min.  
Unit Dimensions:  
Weight:  
Width ..... 386.5 mm (15.22 inches)  
Depth..... 606 mm (23.86 inches)  
Height .... 434 mm (17.09 inches)  
(All dimensions excluding protrusions)  
Recording Paper Size:  
Letter, Legal, A4  
Recording Paper Tray Capacity: Up to 250 sheets  
(with the recommended paper)  
Less than 18 kg (39.7 lbs.)  
Bypass Tray Capacity:  
Effective Scanning Width:  
Effective Printing Width:  
1 sheet (with the recommended paper)  
214 mm (8.43 inches)  
212 mm (8.34 inches)  
Outer appearance, specifications, etc. may be changed without prior notice.  
If any trouble is encountered, contact your authorized TOSHIBA facsimile dealer.  
Compatibility Communication Modes:  
ECM, G3, Exclusive Modes: (EX)  
The clock function and programming data of this device are preserved with a built-  
in battery. If the power supply is cut off over a long time, the battery may become  
discharged, causing the recorded data to be lost.  
Scanning Density:  
Horizontal ..... 8 dots/mm (203 dpi),  
16 dots/mm (406 dpi)  
Vertical ......... 3.85 lines/mm (98 lines/inch)  
7.7 lines/mm (196 lines/inch)  
15.4 lines/mm (392 lines/inch)  
Transmission Rate:  
DP80F V.17 only:  
14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps  
DP85F V17 and V.34:  
33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/  
19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/  
4800/2400 bps  
Encoding Systems:  
JBIG/MMR/MR/MH  
Recording and Printing Method: Electrophotography and Laser Printing  
Laser:  
Laser Diode  
Max. 5 mW, wavelength 770-810 nm  
Memory Capacity:  
Machine Type:  
Applicable Networks:  
242  
DP80F ........ 1.5 MB  
DP85F ........ 3.5 MB  
Desktop type with both transmission and recep-  
tion functions  
PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SUPPLIES  
HARDWARE OPTIONS  
Letter-size Recording Paper:  
Legal-size Recording Paper:  
Drum Kit:  
Optional Paper Tray:  
Handset:  
FU-18L  
HD-18  
DK-18  
TK-18  
Toner Kit:  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[MEMO]  
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TOSHIBA Viewer  
OPERATOR’S MANUAL  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LICENSE AGREEMENT  
Wordcraft International Limited  
Unimessage Pro Software Licence Agreement  
CONDITIONS OF PURCHASE  
Software is licensed subject to the limitations on permitted use. No refund will be given after the purchaser has installed the software. This Licence shall continue for as long as the Product is in use. Failure to comply with the  
terms and conditions detailed below will result in termination of the licence. All copies of the software must be destroyed on termination of the licence.  
PERMITTED USES  
The original purchaser may use the software on a computer system owned or used by the original purchaser for the purpose of any business or profession. The original purchaser may store the software on a hard disk system for use  
only by the permitted number of users and connected only to the permitted number of communication devices as specified in the system configuration file contained within the software product at the time of purchase, plus the  
number of users and devices added by obtaining a valid licensed upgrade from Wordcraft International Limited or an authorised agent of Wordcraft International Limited.  
USES NOT PERMITTED  
a.  
Downloading of the software from a computer service or bulletin board or use in a multi-site arrangement except in respect of users licensed by Wordcraft International Limited to do so.  
b. Use of the software in a computer service business, network, time-sharing, interactive cable television or multiple CPU arrangement except in respect of users licensed by Wordcraft International Limited to do so.  
c.  
The use of a single user version on a second or subsequent computer or network workstation. Details of multi-user packs are available from authorised dealers or authorised distributors of Wordcraft International Limited or  
direct from Wordcraft International Limited.  
d. The use of a network version on a second or subsequent network.  
e.  
f.  
The making of alterations and modifications to the software, merging all or any part of the software with another program, reverse engineering, decompiling, or disassembling of the software.  
The right to rent, assign, lease, transfer or grant sub-licences or other rights to others.  
g. The making of copies of any documentation belonging to Wordcraft International Limited.  
h. The selling or transferring of software marked ‘Not for Resale’ or ‘Evaluation’ or ‘Demonstration’ or ‘Training’.  
i.  
Any other uses not included in “Permitted Uses” above, which would require a licence to use the copyright in the software.  
The license contained in this agreement will terminate automatically and without notice from Wordcraft International Limited if any provision in this agreement is not complied with.  
GOVERNING LAW  
This agreement shall be governed by the laws of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland.  
LIMITED WARRANTY  
Wordcraft International Limited make no representations or warranties, express or implied, of any kind with respect to the contents of this package and specifically disclaim any express or implied warranty of merchantability or  
fitness for any particular purpose. Wordcraft International Limited’s liability shall be limited to replacing any faulty product with alternative product or a cash refund up to but not exceeding the value of the monies paid for the  
product when originally purchased. In no event shall Wordcraft International Limited or their suppliers be liable for any special, incidental, indirect or consequential damages whatsoever (including, without limitation, damages  
for loss of revenue or profits, business interruption, lost or damaged data, or any other loss arising out of the installation of, use of or inability to use this software product). Wordcraft International Limited shall not be responsible  
for any claims arising from the use of software marked ‘Not for Resale’ or ‘Evaluation’ or ‘Demonstration’ or ‘Training’.  
Wordcraft International Limited shall not be responsible for any claims arising from the use of software other than the use for which it was specifically sold.  
Wordcraft International Limited shall not be responsible for any claims by a third party.  
No oral or written information or advice given to Wordcraft International Limited, or given by Wordcraft International Limited , or an authorised representative shall create a warranty or in any way increase the scope of this  
warranty.  
COPYRIGHT  
Software and documentation produced by Wordcraft International Limited is protected by International Copyright Conventions.  
TRADEMARKS  
Wordcraft is a trademark of Wordcraft International Limited.  
All other trademarks are acknowledged.  
Following installation the package will be automatically registered.  
This is a legally binding agreement with Wordcraft International Limited.  
If you feel you cannot accept the conditions defined above please return the complete software package unopened to your supplier.  
1999 Wordcraft International Limited  
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTENTS  
LICENSE AGREEMENT .............................................................246  
CONTENTS ................................................................................247  
INTRODUCTION .........................................................................248  
INSTALLATION AND DEVICE CONFIGURATION .....................249  
Computer Requirements ................................................................249  
Configuration of the CD-ROM ........................................................ 249  
Installing the TOSHIBA Viewer .......................................................250  
Installation .........................................................................................250  
Device Setup .....................................................................................252  
Uninstalling the TOSHIBA Viewer ................................................... 256  
DESCRIPTION OF THE FUNCTIONS ........................................257  
Description of the Main Welcome Menu ......................................... 257  
Browse Folders ...............................................................................258  
Changing the Device Configuration ...................................................258  
Saving the Device Configuration........................................................261  
Add/Edit Phonebook contacts on the DP80F/DP85F.........................263  
Saving the Phonebook ......................................................................265  
Creating a Routing Rules ..................................................................267  
Finding items stored in TOSHIBA Viewer folders ...............................268  
Creating Folder..................................................................................269  
File Scan......................................................................................... 270  
Scanning with your DP80F/DP85F or other TWAIN  
compatible scanner ...........................................................................270  
TOSHIBA Viewer GDI Printer .........................................................272  
Printing from TOSHIBA Viewer UniPad ..............................................272  
Printing from Other Application..........................................................273  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INTRODUCTION  
“TOSHIBA Viewer” has been specially designed for use with DP80F/DP85F’s [Multi-Function Peripherals] and TWAIN compatible scanning devices.  
Subject to the device with which you are using TOSHIBA Viewer and the configuration of your specific copy of TOSHIBA Viewer, available features of TOSHIBA Viewer  
include:  
• Scanning hard copy documents using your TWAIN scanner.  
• Using your DP80F/DP85F as a printer.  
• Using your DP80F/DP85F as a scanner.  
• Configuring your DP80F/DP85F from the PC.  
• Create or edit the Phone/Fax numbers stored in your DP80F/DP85F from the PC.  
• Creating contacts in your TOSHIBA Viewer Phonebooks for frequently used fax numbers and e-mail addresses.  
• Creating graphics files in the Unimessage Pro Viewer.  
• Storing properties of files in the Unimessage Pro folders to be used with TOSHIBA Viewer’s sophisticated search engine.  
• Routing of scanned images using TOSHIBA Viewer’s simple wizard style Routing Rules.  
This manual gives instructions on how to install TOSHIBA Viewer and basic information about some of the other functions listed above.  
248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION AND DEVICE CONFIGURATION  
NOTE:  
Computer Requirements  
The Requirements indicated  
here are minimums. As with  
most Windows applications,  
TOSHIBA Viewer will run  
faster when used on a PC  
with a faster processor or  
with more RAM. If you are  
using other applications on  
your PC at the same time as  
TOSHIBA Viewer, a faster  
processor and additional  
RAM are highly recommend-  
ed.  
The TOSHIBA Viewer system is compatible with Microsoft Windows 95/98, Microsoft Windows NT4.0 or later.  
Make sure that your computer meets the following criteria.  
For installation under Microsoft Windows 95/98 or Microsoft Windows NT 4.0  
PC:  
IBM PC or 100% compatible; Pentium 120 MHz or higher  
Microsoft Windows 95/98, Windows NT 4.0  
Operating system:  
PC memory:  
32M Bytes minimum (64M Bytes recommended) for Windows 95/98 First Edition (Microsoft Windows 95  
OSR1 Service Pack 1 is recommended.)  
32M Bytes minimum (64M Bytes recommended) for Windows 98 Second Edition and Windows NT 4.0  
(When using Windows NT4.0, please ensure that Microsoft NT4.0 Service Pack 4 or later is installed.)  
Display:  
A 24-bit color video card and driver is recommended  
Configuration of the CD-ROM  
The configuration of the CD-ROM and the purposes for each folder are as described below.  
•
•
•
•
\Toshiba Viewer  
Includes the Setup.exe to install the TOSHIBA Viewer, printer driver and TWAIN driver.  
\Drivers9x\Network Printer  
Includes the printer driver for the client computers of Windows 95/98.  
\Drivers9x\PnP Printer & TWAIN  
Includes the printer driver and TWAIN driver for Plug-and-Play installation.  
\DriversNT4\Local Printer & TWAIN  
Includes the printer driver and TWAIN driver for installing by Add Printer function in Windows NT4.0 that DP80F/DP85F is connected in  
local.  
•
\DriversNT4\Network Printer  
Includes the printer driver for Windows NT4.0 that is used as a client computer.  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the TOSHIBA Viewer  
Before installing TOSHIBA  
Installation  
Viewer, your TOSHIBA  
DP80F/DP85F must be  
connected to your PC via  
a parallel cable suitable  
for bi-directional communi-  
cations.  
Prompts may vary de-  
pending on your PC con-  
figuration.  
Insert the CD-ROM  
Select Language  
1
3
The screens show exam-  
ples of Windows 95.  
NOTE:  
Please make sure that  
following terms are  
satisfied.  
NOTE:  
You can install the  
drivers by Plug-and-  
Play function or Add  
Printers function. You  
have to choose differ-  
ent sources in the CD-  
ROM when you install  
by those functions.  
Please see on page  
249 for the configura-  
tion of the CD-ROM  
and the descriptions  
for the sources in each  
folder.  
•
When using Windows  
NT 4.0, make sure you  
have Administrator ac-  
cess rights.  
Click Start and select Run.  
Click OK.  
•
Close all applications  
that are running to  
avoid any conflicts dur-  
ing installation.  
•
The TOSHIBA DP80F/  
DP85F connected to  
your PC is powered  
on.  
Type “D:\Toshiba Viewer\Setup.exe”  
Start the Installation  
2
4
Type “D:\Toshiba Viewer\Setup.exe” where D is your  
Click Next.  
CD-ROM drive.  
Click OK.  
250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the TOSHIBA Viewer - continued  
Installation - continued  
Read the Software License Agreement  
Select the Program Folder  
Exit the Installation Window  
5
7
9
If you agree the License Agreement, click Yes.  
Click Next.  
Select Yes, I want to restart my computer now., and  
click Finish.  
If you click No, exit the Installation. The Installation is  
not completed.  
NOTE:  
You have to restart the computer before using the  
TOSHIBA Viewer.  
After restarting the computer, the Unimessage Pro de-  
vice wizard automatically runs.  
Choose the Destination Location  
Start the Copy  
6
8
Click Next.  
Wait until file copying files is completed.  
The Setup Complete screen automatically appears.  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the TOSHIBA Viewer - continued  
After restarting the computer,  
Device Setup  
the Unimessage Pro device  
wizard automatically appears.  
Unimessage Pro device wizard appears  
Select the device driver installation type  
1
2
NOTE:  
This device setup wizard  
can be operated by running  
the Unimessage Pro  
Startup Wizard in Program  
Folder as well. When plural  
TOSHIBA Faxes are con-  
nected to your PC, you can  
operate the device setups  
for each device.  
Every time you operate the  
device  
setup,  
a
new  
TOSHIBA Viewer utility is  
created.  
Enter the details for each entry field.  
Select Yes, select a device connected to this computer from a  
list of supported devices, and click Next.  
NOTE:  
At least Name, Organization, Address, Country, Telephone  
number, and Fax number must be entered.  
The Address entry must be more than 20 letters.  
After all required entries are completed, click Next.  
252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the TOSHIBA Viewer - continued  
Device Setup - continued  
Select the manufacturer of your fax and  
the device model  
Enter System Device Name and  
Descriptive Device Name  
Select Custom for the type of Setup  
3
4
5
Select Toshiba in the Manufacturers field and the  
Name are already entered. Rename them if required.  
Click Next.  
model that is connected to your PC in the Models field.  
Click Next.  
Click Next.  
Default System Device Name and Descriptive Device  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the TOSHIBA Viewer - continued  
Device Setup - continued  
Select the Port that your DP80F/  
DP85F is connected to  
Select Yes, install TWAIN components  
Select Yes, create a printer  
6
7
8
If there is a TOSHIBA Viewer TWAIN resource available  
for the DP80F/DP85F you are using, TOSHIBA Viewer driver, TOSHIBA Viewer will ask if a printer driver for the  
will ask if the TWAIN resource should be installed as DP80F/DP85F should be created or not. If you choose  
you configure the device.  
to create this printer, it will be named after the DP80F/  
DP85F but you can edit this name if you prefer.  
Click Next.  
If the DP80F/DP85F prints using a TOSHIBA Viewer Click Next.  
NOTE:  
If you choose not to create the “print” printer driver  
during the definition of the device or it is deleted, you  
can create the “print” printer driver for the DP80F/  
DP85F later. To do this, open the Devices folder,  
right click on the appropriate device and select Cre-  
ate printer. For further details, see the Help for  
Create printer.  
Click Next.  
254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the TOSHIBA Viewer - continued  
Device Setup - continued  
Select whether to creat a shortcut and  
the location  
Complete the device setup  
TOSHIBA Viewer starts  
9
10  
11  
Click Finish.  
NOTE:  
If you want to install several TOSHIBA Viewers, it is  
required to change the name of the shortcut to avoid  
the name being overlapped.  
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Uninstalling the TOSHIBA Viewer  
Select Start, Settings, Control Panel  
Confirm File Deletion dialog appears  
Uninstallation starts  
1
3
5
Double click Add/Remove Programs.  
Click Yes.  
After removing files is completed, click OK.  
NOTE:  
During the uninstallation, the confirmation dialogs for  
removing the shared files appear. Click OK to delete  
all shared files in the TOSHIBA Viewer program  
folder.  
Select Unimessage Pro  
TOSHIBA Viewer alert dialog appears  
2
4
Click Add/Remove....  
Exit all applications running on your machine, and click Restart your computer to complete the uninstallation.  
OK.  
Some files are deleted after restarting the computer.  
256  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DESCRIPTION OF THE FUNCTIONS  
Descriptions and instruc-  
Description of the Main Welcome Menu  
tions for general functions  
are described in this sec-  
tion. For details and in-  
structions  
other  
than  
those described in this  
manual, please refer to  
the TOSHIBA Viewer on-  
line Help.  
From this menu you can access the main TOSHIBA Viewer system. You can examine the lists of scanned and filed images by clicking the  
TOSHIBA Viewer logo.  
The round buttons provide quick access to some of the TOSHIBA Viewer functions and can include a combination of the following:  
Browse Folders: This takes you to the list of folders within TOSHIBA Viewer so that you can check on the progress of messages, examine the  
lists of received, transmitted, filed messages and print these lists or individual messages.  
Copy:  
This combines the functions of TWAIN scanning and printing and allows you to make multiple hardcopies of a document in the  
automatic document feeder of the TWAIN scanner.  
File Scan:  
This takes you to the TWAIN scanner driver or, for DP80F/DP85F, the TOSHIBA Viewer Scan setup dialog so that you can  
scan documents or images into your PC.  
Email Scan:  
Setup:  
This scans a document or image using any TWAIN scanner then automatically attach it to an email message.  
This takes you to a dialog where settings on your DP80F/DP85F can be configured from the PC; it may also allow you to  
exchange Phonebook contacts with your DP80F/DP85F’s One Touch or Speed Dial functions.  
Help:  
Exit:  
To access TOSHIBA Viewer on-line Help.  
To close TOSHIBA Viewer.  
257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Browse Folders  
When you click Browse  
Folders button or the  
TOSHIBA Viewer logo on  
the Welcome menu, the  
TOSHIBA Viewer main  
display will appear.  
Changing the Device Configuration  
During the Unimessage  
Device Wizard that con-  
Open the Device folder  
1
cluded the installation  
process, you will have  
configured  
Viewer for use with your  
DP80F/DP85F. Should  
TOSHIBA  
NOTE:  
•
When you close the  
main TOSHIBA Viewer  
display, the Welcome  
menu will reappear. If  
you prefer to skip the  
Welcome menu, select  
Program from the Set-  
up menu, click on the  
Application tab and  
uncheck the Show  
“welcome” screen op-  
tion then click OK. The  
Welcome menu will not  
to be displayed begin-  
ning with the next time  
you start TOSHIBA  
Viewer.  
you want to, you can  
reconfigure how TOSHIBA  
Viewer works with your  
DP80F/DP85F via the De-  
vice folder.  
Also you can remotely  
configure the device con-  
figuration using this pro-  
gram.  
TOSHIBA Viewer Display is the menu list - File, Edit,  
View, Message, Setup, Window, and Help. Below the  
menu list is the main toolbar - Open, Print, Acquire and  
Find. For further descriptions of the each menu item,  
select Contents and Index in Help menu to view the  
Help.  
Double click the appropriate entry in the list of devices  
that appears in the right hand pane.  
Device settings appears.  
The remainder of the screen is divided into two parts:  
•
On the left is the list of available folders.  
To open a folder in the right pane, click its name in  
the folder tree. If a folder contains any unread items  
TOSHIBA Viewer will display the number of unread  
items within each folder after each folder’s name in  
this section of the screen.  
•
•
You can switch be-  
tween open folders in  
the main TOSHIBA  
Viewer display using  
Ctrl+TAB or Ctrl+F6.  
•
On the right is a display area for individual or multiple  
folder.  
You can close the cur-  
rent folder in the main  
TOSHIBA Viewer dis-  
play using Ctrl+F4.  
You can select folders to be displayed by clicking on  
them in the folder list.  
At the top of the Main  
258  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Browse Folders - continued  
Changing the Device Configuration - continued  
Change the TOSHIBA Viewer settings  
2
2a  
Change the device settings  
2b  
Change the port  
Click on Device tab.  
Click on Port tab.  
Check on Print and/or Scan if you want the DP80F/DP85F to be  
worked as a printer and/or scanner using the TOSHIBA Viewer.  
Select the port that your computer connects to your DP80F/DP85F.  
Click on OK to save changes.  
When you want to change the port, go to Step 2b.  
When you want to configure the device settings, click on Setup...  
and go to Step 3.  
When you want to save changes, click on OK.  
259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Browse Folders - continued  
Changing the Device Configuration - continued  
Change the Device settings  
3
You can remotely configure the  
device settings using the  
TOSHIBA Viewer.  
3a  
Edit the device configuration  
3b  
Load a set file on your hard disk  
After clicking Setup... on the  
Device  
Tab  
screen,  
the  
TOSHIBA Viewer retrieves the  
device settings from the DP80F/  
DP85F.  
When you want to change the  
device settings file directly, go  
to Step 3a.  
When you want to change the  
device settings file by copying  
the settings from a set file lo-  
cated on your hard disk, go to  
Step 3b.  
Select or enter the value for items that you want to change the  
configurations.  
Double-click on Add settings file.  
A “New settings” file is created.  
Click the ü button to download the new settings to your DP80F/  
DP85F. Back to Step 2a.  
When you want to change the  
device settings file by copying  
the settings from a user settings  
file stored within TOSHIBA  
Viewer, go to Step 3c.  
NOTE:  
Click the ✘ button to cancel adding/editing the device configura-  
tion. Back to Step 2a.  
Right-click on the new settings file and select Load....  
For additional information on a  
specific item, refer to Help and  
the appropriate section of the  
NOTE:  
In order to create a user settings file to be saved on your hard  
disk, refer to the section “Saving the Device Configuration”.  
DP80F/DP85F  
Manual.  
Operator's  
The Load settings screen appears. Designate the hard disk loca-  
tion of the desired set file, select the file, then click on Open. The  
set file is loaded.  
Continue to Step 3c.  
260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Browse Folders - continued  
Changing the Device Configuration - continued  
Saving the Device Configuration  
The device setting file opened  
by TOSHIBA Viewer (default  
name TOSHIBA) is a temporary  
Open the Device folder  
1
Change the Device settings - continued  
3
“working” file.  
Every time  
TOSHIBA Viewer is opened, the  
program accesses the attached  
facsimile and reads the current  
settings.  
3c  
Copy the device configuration  
You can store the settings within  
TOSHIBA Viewer or save them  
as a file on your hard disk.  
This is useful when performing a  
full memory clear or upgrading  
the machine’s firmware because  
you can easily re-configure the  
device by downloading the  
stored settings.  
Double click the appropriate entry in the list of devices  
that appears in the right hand pane.  
Left-click and hold on the user settings file, then drag it to the device  
settings file, and release the left mouse button.  
Device settings appears.  
Click on Setup...  
2
NOTE:  
Initially, your mouse pointer will become a “circle with diagonal  
line”. Upon reaching the desired settings file, the pointer will  
take the form of an “address label”. Upon releasing the left  
mouse button, the contents of the user settings file are copied to  
the device settings file.  
Click the ü button to download the new settings to your DP80F/  
DP85F. Back to Step 2a.  
NOTE:  
Click the ✘ button to cancel adding/editing the device configura-  
tion. Back to Step 2a.  
Toshiba Setup appears.  
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Browse Folders - continued  
Saving the Device Configuration - continued  
Save new settings  
Create the new settings file  
3
4
4a  
Save within TOSHIBA Viewer  
4b  
Save as a file on your hard disk  
Double-click on Add settings file.  
A “New settings” file is created. Enter an appropriate  
name for the new settings file.  
To copy the device configuration to the new settings file,  
left-click and hold on the device settings file (e.g.  
“TOSHIBA”) then drag it to the new settings file (e.g.  
“DP85F LA Office”) and release the left mouse button.  
Right-click on the new settings file and select Save.  
Right-click on the new settings file and select Save  
as....  
NOTE:  
When you click the ü button or ✘ button to close the The Save settings screen appears. Designate the loca-  
screen, TOSHIBA Viewer will prompt you to save the tion on your hard disk and enter an appropriate file  
NOTE:  
Initially, your mouse pointer will become a “circle with  
diagonal line”. Upon reaching the desired settings  
file, the pointer will take the form of an “address la-  
bel”. Upon releasing the left mouse button, the con-  
tents of the device settings file are copied to the new  
settings file.  
file.  
name, then click on OK.  
NOTE:  
The settings file is saved as a set file on your hard  
disk. The file extension is “set”. This file can be  
retrieved by TOSHIBA Viewer.  
To save the new settings within the TOSHIBA Viewer,  
go to Step 4a.  
To save the new settings as a file on your local hard  
disk, go to Step 4b.  
262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Browse Folders - continued  
Add/Edit Phonebook contacts on the DP80F/DP85F  
TOSHIBA Viewer permits  
you to remotely add/edit  
One Touch and/or Abbre-  
viated Number contacts  
on your DP80F/DP85F.  
Open the Devices folder  
Change the settings  
1
2
When you want to change  
the current device  
Setup device  
phonebook  
2a  
Edit the phonebook  
phonebook, go to Step 2a.  
When you want to change  
the phonebook by copying  
the settings from a set file  
located on your hard disk,  
go to Step 2b.  
Select the device and click Setup device phonebook  
button.  
When you want to change  
the phonebook by copying  
the settings from a user  
settings file stored within  
TOSHIBA Viewer, go to  
Step 2c.  
“Reading data from device” appears as Viewer interro-  
gates the attached facsimile.  
To add new phonebook contacts, click on Abb. Num-  
bers, Group Numbers, or One Touch Keys in the left  
pane. Then double click on Add... (e.g. “Add Abb.  
Number”) in the right pane. Tel List Entry appears at the  
end of the existing list. Double click on the desired  
items and enter the appropriate values.  
For further details on  
phonebook setup, refer to  
Help.  
Toshiba Phonebook Setup appears.  
To edit phonebook contacts, double click on the item  
you want to edit then enter the new data.  
Click the ü button to download the new settings to your  
DP80F/DP85F.  
Click the ✘ button to cancel adding/editing the  
phonebook contacts.  
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Browse Folders - continued  
Add/Edit Phonebook contacts on the DP80F/DP85F - continued  
Change the settings - continued  
2
2b  
Load a set file from your hard disk  
2c  
Copy the phonebook settings  
Double-click on Add settings file.  
A “New settings” file is created.  
Left-click and hold on the user phonebook file, then drag it to the  
device phonebook file, and release the left mouse button.  
NOTE:  
Initially, your mouse pointer will become a “circle with diagonal  
line”. Upon reaching the desired phonebook file, the pointer will  
take the form of an “address label”. Upon releasing the left  
mouse button, the contents of the user phonebook file are copied  
to the device phonebook file.  
Click the ü button to download the new settings to your DP80F/  
DP85F.  
Right-click on the new settings file and select Load....  
NOTE:  
NOTE:  
In order to create a user phonebook file to be saved on your hard  
disk, refer to the section “Saving the Phonebook”.  
Click the ✘ button to cancel adding/editing the phonebook con-  
tacts.  
The Load settings screen appears. Designate the hard disk loca-  
tion of the desired set file, select the file, then click on Open. The  
set file is loaded.  
Continue to Step 2c.  
264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Browse Folders - continued  
Saving the Phonebook  
The device phonebook opened  
by TOSHIBA Viewer (default  
name TOSHIBA) is a temporary  
Open the Device folder  
Create the new phonebook file  
1
2
“working” file.  
Every time  
TOSHIBA Viewer is opened, the  
program accesses the attached  
facsimile and reads the current  
phonebook settings.  
Setup device  
phonebook  
You can store the phonebook  
settings within TOSHIBA Viewer  
or save as a set file on your  
hard disk.  
Select the device and click the Setup device phonebook button.  
This is useful when performing a  
full memory clear or upgrading  
the machine firmware because  
you can easily re-program the  
“Reading data from device” appears as Viewer interrogates the at-  
tached facsimile.  
Double-click on Add settings file.  
A “New settings” file is created. Enter an appropriate name for the  
new settings file.  
machine’s  
phonebook  
the  
by  
downloading  
stored  
phonebook file.  
To copy the current device phonebook settings to the new settings  
file, left-click and hold on the device phonebook file (e.g.  
“TOSHIBA”) then drag it to the new settings file (e.g. “LA Office  
Phonebook) and release the left mouse button.  
Toshiba Phonebook Setup appears.  
NOTE:  
Initially, your mouse pointer will become a “circle with diagonal  
line”. Upon reaching the desired phonebook file, the pointer will  
take the form of an “address label”. Upon releasing the left  
mouse button, the contents of the device phonebook file are  
copied to the new phonebook file.  
To save the new settings within TOSHIBA Viewer, go to Step 3a.  
To save the new phonebook as a file on your local hard disk. go to  
Step 3b.  
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Browse Folders - continued  
Saving the Phonebook - continued  
Save new phonebook  
3
3a  
Save within TOSHIBA Viewer  
3b  
Save as a file on your hard disk  
Right-click on the new phonebook file and select Save.  
Right-click on the new phonebook file and select Save as....  
NOTE:  
The Save settings screen appears. Designate the location on your  
When you click the ü button or ✘ button to close the screen, hard disk and enter an appropriate file name, then click on OK.  
TOSHIBA Viewer will prompt you to save the file.  
NOTE:  
The phonebook file is saved as a set file on your hard disk. The  
file extension is “set”. This file can be retrieved by TOSHIBA  
Viewer.  
266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Browse Folders - continued  
Creating a Routing Rules  
When an image is scanned, it is  
normally stored in the Scanned  
images folder.  
Select Setup, Routing Rules... from the menu  
Enter the name of the rule  
1
3
You can change the action by  
defining one or more Routing  
rules.  
User Routing Rules are:  
•
Created and maintained by  
any TOSHIBA Viewer user.  
•
•
Specific to the user.  
Processed by the TOSHIBA  
Viewer user in the order they  
are shown, from top to bot-  
tom.  
Click New... to create a new rule.  
Click Finish.  
Routing Rules Wizard appears.  
Some sample rules are supplied  
with TOSHIBA Viewer. To acti-  
vate them, go to the Routing  
Rules dialog, select a suitable  
sample to base your own rule  
on, click Copy, click Modify, en-  
ter the incomplete information  
and click Finish to store the  
completed rule.  
Check on the terms for a rule  
Click Move up to change the apply  
order  
2
4
For further details of Routing  
Rules, click Help on the Routing  
Rules dialog to view related help  
topic.  
Click Next. Follow the prompts to create a rule.  
Click OK.  
For further details of creating and modifying the Routing Rules, refer  
to Help.  
267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Browse Folders - continued  
Finding items stored in TOSHIBA Viewer folders  
Once files are stored in  
Define a new search  
Click Find icon  
2
1
TOSHIBA Viewer folders, you  
can ask TOSHIBA Viewer to find  
items for you based on their  
properties.  
NOTE:  
•
You can also search folders  
by selecting the Search his-  
tory.  
Find icon  
•
In order to search in the spe-  
cific folder, right click on the  
specific folder and select  
Find.  
Check on Include subfolders when you want to search folders in  
subfolders as well.  
Click OK.  
Searching starts.  
For further details of searching, click Help on the Search dialog to  
view a related help topic.  
268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Browse Folders - continued  
Creating Folder  
TOSHIBA Viewer uses folders  
to store messages that you  
NOTE:  
Select a folder where you want to create a  
folder in  
1
•
When you drag from a Windows Explorer to a TOSHIBA Viewer  
folder, TOSHIBA Viewer only stores a reference to the file and  
document properties for the file.  
have scanned, and details about  
files you have on your compu-  
ter. You can then search all or  
some of these folders to find  
messages or files at a later  
date.  
i.e.The file itself is not copied into the TOSHIBA Viewer folder  
and will be opened from its original location when you open  
the reference to it within TOSHIBA Viewer.  
•
If you drag from a TOSHIBA Viewer folder to another TOSHIBA  
Viewer folder, TOSHIBA Viewer will normally copy the file to the  
target TOSHIBA Viewer folder. However if the source references  
a file outside of the TOSHIBA Viewer folder structure (i.e. was  
dragged in from a Windows Explorer folder) only the reference to  
the external file is moved or copied.  
You can create your own fold-  
ers, and each folder can contain  
sub-folders.  
•
•
If you open an image file (.bmp, .jpg, .tif, .pcx, .fax or .fcs) in the  
TOSHIBA Viewer and then select Save in Unimessage Pro  
folder fro the File menu, the image file will always be stored in  
the TOSHIBA Viewer folder.  
Select File - New - Folder.  
With TOSHIBA DP80F/DP85F it is possible to download to and  
upload from mailboxes within a DP80F/DP85F using drag and  
drop of items. If your TOSHIBA DP80F/DP85F supports these  
functions you will see folders within the Devices folder on the left  
side of the main TOSHIBA Viewer display. Open these folders to  
review the contents of the DP80F/DP85F’s mailboxes and drop  
items into these folders to download items to the mailboxes.  
Type a name for the new folder  
2
Click OK.  
Type a brief comment describing, for example, the folder’s intended  
use, if required.  
269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File Scan  
You can use your DP80F/  
DP85F to scan hard copy  
Scanning with your DP80F/DP85F or other TWAIN compatible scanner  
documents  
into  
any  
Set the hard copies to be  
scanned in the document  
tray before scanning.  
Click File Scan on Main Welcome Menu  
Click Scan  
TWAIN compatible appli-  
cation you are running  
(e.g. PaintShop Pro, Corel  
Photo Paint, etc.).  
1
3
NOTE:  
•
Before scanning, you  
can preview the scan-  
ning document by  
clicking Preview.  
File Scan also provides a  
function that allows you to  
build a multi-page docu-  
ment from several sepa-  
rate TWAIN scans. This  
is useful if you want to When you use the other  
scan different pages with TWAIN compatible appli-  
different settings, or if you cations to scan, the scan-  
want scan both sides of a ner settings dialog ap-  
document.  
pears.  
Click Select source....  
Select Source dialog appears.  
The scanner setting dialog appears.  
NOTE:  
You can also operate  
the scan from the Main  
TOSHIBA Viewer Dis-  
play. However, it is  
not allowed you to re-  
Select the TWAIN Scanner  
Set the scanner settings  
2
4
build  
a
multi-page  
document.  
Click Select.  
For further details of scanner settings, click Help to view  
Back to Scan multiple pages dialog.  
a related help topic.  
Click Scan.  
Back to Scan multiple pages dialog.  
270  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File Scan - continued  
Scanning with your DP80F/DP85F or other TWAIN compatible scanner - continued  
Select the Scanned pages  
Select what you do with the  
scanned images  
5
6
Click Add.  
Click OK.  
Repeat all scanned pages are added into a document.  
For further details of the New message received dialog,  
click Help to view a related help topic.  
If you want to continue scanning, repeat from step 3 to  
4.  
NOTE:  
You can add the scanned pages in desired order to  
create a multi-page document.  
For further details of the Scan multiple pages dialog,  
click Help to view a related help topic.  
Click OK.  
271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TOSHIBA Viewer GDI Printer  
You can print a document  
using TOSHIBA Viewer  
GDI Printer, if you have  
Printing from TOSHIBA Viewer UniPad  
The TOSHIBA Viewer  
UniPad is the viewer in-  
corporated into TOSHIBA  
Viewer. The UniPad can  
view the scanned image.  
UniPad is opened.  
Double click a scanned image  
Select the DP80F/DP85F Printer for  
Name  
selected to create  
a
1
2
printer during the installa-  
tion. You can print a docu-  
ment  
from  
TOSHIBA  
Viewer UniPad and other  
applications.  
NOTE:  
TOSHIBA Viewer GDI  
Printer is created as  
same as the Windows  
printer drivers in Print-  
ers folder. If you have  
not created, you can  
also  
create  
a
TOSHIBA Viewer GDI  
Printer from the Main  
TOSHIBA Viewer Dis-  
play. To create a GDI  
Select Print from File menu.  
Continue general operation for printer properties and The print job is sent to DP80F/DP85F.  
print settings.  
Click OK.  
The scanned image is printed.  
Printer,  
refer  
to  
Changing the Device  
Configuration  
on  
page 270.  
272  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TOSHIBA Viewer GDI Printer - continued  
Printing from Other Application  
You can also print a document  
Select Page Setup... in File menu  
Select DP80F/DP85F Printer for Name  
1
3
from other applications using  
the TOSHIBA Viewer GDI  
Printer.  
The procedure is the example  
with Windows NotePad. The  
procedure may vary depending  
on the application.  
Page Setup dialog appears.  
Ckick Properties for general operation for printer properties.  
Printer properties dialog appears.  
Click Printer...  
2
Page Setup for Printer dialog appears.  
Click OK.  
Click OK on Page Setup for Printer dialog.  
Back to Page Setup dialog.  
273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TOSHIBA Viewer GDI Printer - continued  
Printing from Other Application - continued  
Set print settings  
Select Print in File menu  
4
5
Click OK.  
Page Setup dialog is closed.  
The print job is sent to DP80F/DP85F.  
The document is printed.  
274  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
© Copyright TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION 2000  
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  
DP80F/DP85F  
Printed in Japan  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Taylor Double Oven 050771 m User Manual
Technicolor Thomson Universal Remote 14MS15UT User Manual
Topcom Computer Drive 8144827 User Manual
Toshiba Printer B 570 QP Series User Manual
Trane Thermostat XT500C User Manual
Tricity Bendix Cooktop SIE 252 User Manual
ViewSonic Network Router WR100 User Manual
VXI Computer Hardware TC4XYY User Manual
Watlow Electric Electric Heater ULTRAMIC 600 User Manual
Weed Eater Lawn Mower 168303 User Manual